Home

2010 Dodge Ram Truck Owner`s Manual

1. 558 Transmission 242202420004 HAAR Had d EEN Ed 90 Automatic lees 303 308 531 PINO RE ONE EE eee OE EE es 558 Maintenance AR AAS RR EE EE N Dol ENE oe ses ERROR Gee ee 4 REA Da 300 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless ENUY gue edcae dun RYE pe DE 24 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 142 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry uas ERRARE 20 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Tread Wear Indicators llle 411 ED Odometer sess seen deine decies dein eae ee 204 Turn Signals sets EE we ee WES 118 200 545 548 UCI Connector uvas n9 pie VEER RE 265 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 98 N INDEX 607 Uniform Tire Quality Grades Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector Universal Transmitter sss amp Sea Een deck rares 142 Utility Rails Rear Cargo Area 184 Variance COMPASS a cuu va wi Di Ete dasa irra 292 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle Loddilg 144i e ios emm HARDE 403 439 Vehicle Modifications Alterations d Vehicle Storage actuosa yeso Ser aon dos foede 289 544 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System 04 274 Voice Recognition System VR 0 98 WOUMICICN 2 4 223092 bee Ghee RA Kg tee ee na 208 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Desch pon x epee ojo terse ones eee es 196 200 Warnings and Cautions s m 3 544 495 6 Warranty Information 2
2. 584 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 206 225 Restraint Head eee 101 Restraints Child sua opse R HERE EER ER De 66 72 Nn INDEX 603 Restraints OCUPAN xoa ke rius SEIS OE VRAE s7 Rotation Tires 2243 ER ege Oe ied dei dong ee d 416 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 82 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 4222s 4485 84 Safety Defects Reporting 0 584 Safety Exhaust Gas usadas esr dod e dorum oes 81 Safety Information Tire uos doe ear ee ea Rd og RR 396 Bact Wis ga eeduwe seed DERE HOES SS ER ES 80 Satellite Radio Antenna 2442084 BERE EA RR Se 20 Satellite Radio Uconnect studios 270 Schedule Maintenance leen 560 Seat Belt Maintenance uua ceases eu cde ina 599 beat Belt Reminder uua 43 EER C PER EY 50 Seat Belts 2 0 00 00 00 eee eee ee 37 38 82 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 47 And Pregnant WONG xoa RE REED bina oss 5l Child Restraint 1 49 64545440485 66 68 Pender E aoe 51 PROM EE 90 92 9999 sues E EPAST URSUS ST eA 38 IS pecHOll sae KAP HER hs ERROR ARE ROS S 82 PICLCNSIONCIS ix uses qub rh EX aur Xem ss qa 49 RKemind r PARS AE OER RE eee en REA 215 wc RES ORR APIE hee hee OND 99 106 Vel out AR EE Kho ER EET OO 99 CIT ware EE EE TEE 68 Folding Hoof 1x22 393 ae obs RE ees 170 leo 103 NGON pearance sae m arare Sod abord dira 106 TOWER 534922992 5S das DEE Omie th os 102 KRecumie ia ADRES BE ESI ROLE R
3. 446 O lowing Reguirements 244244 ed eder 447 TOWING TS iuo we OP wik oos bre iced s end 457 01500 Models Only E2500 79300 Models Oa ins erer aa RR di N Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc O Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models O Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Models ll Equipment Identification Plate 296 STARTING AND OPERATING ee ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belt The starter should not be operated for more than 15 second intervals Waiting a few seconds between such intervals will protect the starter from overheating WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Normal Starting Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Turn the key fob to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the key fob to the OFF position wait five seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Automatic Transmission Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTR
4. 128 ll Parksense Rear Park Assist If Equipped O Parksense Sensors O Parksense Warning Display 129 O Enable Disable Parksense ss sides SE 134 O Service Dark et ER oa saco seres bo ps err 199 Cleaning Parksense is osx m 135 O Parksense System Usage And Precautions 135 ll Parkview Rear Back Up Camera If PQUIDDEC as 444 ee 4 3 EER PRED Ce Bere 138 D Turning Parkview On Or Off With Navigation Multimedia Radio 139 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M O Turning Parkview On Or Off Without ll Power Sunroof If Equipped 149 Navigation Multimedia Radio 140 O Open Sunroof Express Mode 150 ll Overhead Console If Equipped 140 2 Closing Sunroof Express 150 D Courtesy Reading Lights un O Pinch Protect Feature 040 150 W Garage Door Opener If Equipped ts O Pinch Protect Override 150 O Programming HomeLink 144 D Venting Sunroof Express 05 151 O Gate Operator Canadian Programming 146 Hounshade Operation icu scis eee Sachen sers 151 D Using HomeLink 1 1 6s eee eee eee id Ec Vind BUGUN so sanies 9 7 x BEDR ES 151 EE pe N 147 O Sunroof Maintenance 151 T 147 O Sunroof Fully Closed 4 sus soas RS rmn 151 TT N NN 148 B Electrical Power Outlets 151 O General Inform
5. M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 564 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter m Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate the tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the Rotate the tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Lube the front drive shaft fitting Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the CV joints change if using your vehicle for police Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for taxi fleet off road snow plowing or damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary frequent trailer towing Inspect exhaust system including isolators Inspect exhaust system including isolators M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Ord
6. 424 ibe Or ire sus eh rey a 284 ERA eee bake 411 O General Information 428 El Replacement Hie os due cone atch es UR 412 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 la Fuel Requirements o42424 99 2 9 und d 428 O Ethanol Fuel E85 iet eke a 4 oo 434 Uo And 47 Efe uo so sucer bee ea y 428 Hus ROguiaeHielllS 19329 92 39 sone 1 434 Bio JE EET acus esos pap s cedi dod N Rosen 429 O Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel o Reformulated Gasoline 429 Vehicles E85 And Gasoline Vehicles 435 O Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 430 O Starting 2 ee n ne 436 O E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 430 O Cruising Range 4 OMMT In Gasoline essen 431 Replacement Parts D Materials Added To Fuel 431 Maintenance 1 6 6 ees ees EE O Fuel System Cautions 0000 431 la Adding Fuel 0 437 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 432 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 438 lll Flexible Fuel 4 7L Engine Only W Vehicle Loading ee 439 I POUIPPCG o ie wine e RE Goh dS B 433 E Certification Label 245229 KERE ER RS 439 O E85 General Information 433 ll Snowplow aM Trailer Towing 2 suede p ECORRS REOR Ra E E 441 O Common Towing Definitions 441 O Trailer Hitch Classification 445 O Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings ad en gre bone oe P rds s 446 O Trailer And Tongue Weight
7. 472 Jomp DEANS secte ce VERA oe AR HEG RAD 492 TOW Hook 3 4546 66550000494 054045045 497 TIOWIUE 285 640g TEE OE OE oe as 498 Emission Control System Maintenance 508 560 BESING 2 3 92249 2 2999 5 2 999 220 hi 504 505 506 Air Cleaner 44 6444 e au 9 Per HERE eR 514 Block Heater iss tees URE RR sews 299 Break In Recommendations 79 Compartment Identification 504 505 506 Coolant Antifreeze eee ee 597 Exhaust Gas Caution SS SS 81 432 Flooded Staring sipa Ge geet ene timis 298 Fuel ISequitemellls ga ceseeatees HERE EERS 955 Jump SIAHING aieo aeu ad marin SUR BEDE Seres 492 Oil ien sae HS RE 2h ee 511 555 557 OUP Cap eus HER eso 993 sae senso ess 512 Oil Selection 00000085 512 555 OUssVMIMCHC aug God eae Pra Oe aes Bod ER 513 Tempetature Gauge sasie DENKER Ga AR 200 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 61 Equipment Identification Plate 470 Exhaust Gas Caution 000 81 432 Ediadst le serrer ire 89 399694 FORE d 81 519 N INDEX 595 Exterior DIS DUBS oeste SERVE REDS R SE 54 113 EXIGHOP iS ons RRARRED KAS PES HER RAP E 84 Filters Air Cleaner 2 2 20 ers SORA eh Be Be HR ASE 514 Puce OL 2ngieeearieatesss See ARE di 513 557 Fome OU DEPOA srs ance ce pa rores HO 513 Flashers TU al sse war eee oo ad eae a 84 118 200 Flat Tie StOWOCe ip ta ee heap ELI ER don gas 491 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Casinet RTE eru een ER RR re ARE
8. 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting 496 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can often be moved by a rocking motion Move the shift lever rhythmically between DRIVE and REVERSE while ap plying slight pressure to the accelerator In general the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective Allow the engine to idle with the transmission shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween 1st
9. 4WD LOCK awo LOW 4WD AUTO 2WD V NEUTRAL Transfer Case Switch Five Position This electronically shifted transfer case provides five mode positions e Two wheel drive high range 2WD e Four wheel drive automatic range 4WD AUTO e Four wheel drive lock range AWD LOCK STARTING AND OPERATING 327 e Four wheel drive low range AWD LOW e Neutral NEUTRAL This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two wheel drive position WD or four wheel drive position 4WD AUTO for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD For variable driving conditions the 4WD AUTO mode can be used In this mode the front axle is engaged but the vehicle s power is sent to the rear wheels Four wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction Because the front axle is en gaged this mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD mode When additional traction is required the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock 328 STARTING AND OPERATING ee the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Refer to Shifting Procedure for spe cific shifting instr
10. 332 STARTING AND OPERATING ee the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera tor pedal after turning the control switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either running or OFF This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position 2WD or 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK 4WD LOW NOTE When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped Use either of the following procedures Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine running slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 While still rolling rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to complete stop 2 With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine either OFF or running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 NOTE If Steps
11. e Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required e Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts 358 STARTING AND OPERATING M e After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent an accident If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessaty e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation WINCH USAGE POWER WAGON ONLY IF EQUIPPED Things To Know Before Using Your Winch General Winch Information Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery winch This winch uses the electrical power from the vehicle c
12. 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 399 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 400 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of
13. 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE e If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the system is in Mix or Defrost mode the Recirculation LED indicator will flash three times and then turn off to indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed e Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e In cold or damp weather the use of the Recirculation mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the Outside Air position e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection by pressing the A C button Air Outlets The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control airflow NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers Economy Mode If ECONOMY mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the LED indicator and the A C compressor Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temperature Air Conditioning Operation Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning A C A LED will illu yy minate when the A C system is engaged 045632844 MAX A C For maximum cooling when MAX A C is selected the A C is turned on automatically and the air is recircu
14. 304 STARTING AND OPERATING M PUE WARNING This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake Always apply the parking the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift movement and possible injury or damage lever in the PARK position It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the transmission into PARK remove the key fob from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key fob is removed from the ignition the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furt
15. 81054f07 Folding Flap and Rolling Bag WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 477 81054ed3 060505827 Jack and Tools Tied Jack and Tools 1500 Series 4 Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding the jack by the jack turn screw slip the jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the fastener on the floor and then secure to the floor pan using the wing bolt Reinstall the plastic cover 478 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 060507579 Jack and Tools 2500 3500 Series Removing The Spare Tire Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the truck Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube Insert the tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube Rotate the wheel wrench handle coun terclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel NOTE Always stow the spare tire with the valve stem facing the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 479 NOTE The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch Preparations 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt
16. Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation Do not reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 409 Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with yo
17. Front Instrument Panel Cupholders 40 20 40 Seats The cupholders are located in the pull out tray at the bottom of the center stack The pull out tray must be secured when opened To secure the tray push down until it clicks 035105612 Front Cupholders N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Front Instrument Panel Cupholders Floor Rear Cupholder Quad Cab Mounted Shifter Quad Cab vehicles may be equipped with a rear cup For vehicles equipped with bucket seats and a floor holder that consists of two cup wells for rear passenger mounted shifter there are two cupholders located in the convenience floor console Rear Cup Wells Cupholders Floor Mounted Shifter 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Cupholder Crew Cab STORAGE Crew Cab vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders Glove Box Storage located in the center armrest The glove box is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel and features both an upper and lower storage area 035105803 Crew Cab Rear Armrest Cupholder 035205586 Glove Box Upper Glove Box 2 Lower Glove Box N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 To open the upper glove box push upward on the handle To open the lower glove box pull on the handle to release release The glove box door will automatically open the latch and lower the door Upper Glove Box Lower Glove Box 035
18. Q s Ml ANI i ya AL Ld y AE amp Q 9 071305565 1 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Battery 11 Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 Integrated Power Module 506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 071405704 1 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 Integrated Power Module 3 Engine Oil Fill 9 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 4 Engine Oil Dipstick 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 Battery N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBDII This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though
19. e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses TP KR55120123 2671 5120123 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 7L and 4 7L Engine All engines except 5 7L engines are de signed to meet all emissions regulations 87 and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality un 800dfab leaded regular gasoline having an oc tane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD 5 7L Engine The 5 7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline hav ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu facturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD 89 800dfab7 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting
20. Dimmer Control 031405772 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Cargo Light The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the cargo button 031405776 Cargo Light Switch The cargo lights will also turn on for approximately 30 seconds when a RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed as part of the Illuminated Entry feature Lights on Reminder If the headlights parking lights or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated right for 10 minutes the interior lights will automatically turn off If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off NOTE Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Daytime Running Lights DRL Canada Only and Fleet Vehicles The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except PARK This provides a constant Lights ON condition until the
21. Four Wheel Drive Lock Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range provides additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only 4WD LOW Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range provides low speed four wheel drive It locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information Shifting Procedure NOTE e If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected posi tion indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again e f all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met the current position indicator light will turn OFF the
22. WARNING WARNING Continued e You can be seriously even fatally injured riding in a seat with the seatback reclined Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest If you ride in e Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seat back to swing dump forward on manual recliner seats Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while actuating the handle The seatback may swing forward and hit you causing injury This dump feature allows access to the storage bin behind the seat To avoid injury place your hand on the seatback and actuate the handle then posi tion the seatback in the desired position Continued Adjustable Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of neck injury in the event of a rear impact Pull up or push down on the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as practical at least to the level of the ears this position the shoulder harness will no longer be restraining you In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and receive serious or fatal injuries Recline in a seat only when the vehicle is parked 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To lower the head restraint push in the button and then the position of the seat The power seatback switch is push down on the head restraint used to adjust the angle of the seatback to position yourself in the most comfortable driving position Push forward or rearwar
23. cies for further information WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to have enough power to continue running when the key start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire fob is released If this occurs continue cranking with the causing serious personal injury Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the Normal Starting procedure should be repeated After Starting The idle speed is automatically controlled and will de crease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a erounded three wire extension cord 1500 Models The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the passenger side of the vehicle near the right head lamp assembly It is located between the front grill and the radiator but underneath the black upper seal 2500 3500 Models The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille by the right front tow hook I
24. e Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on or straddle the winch cable Never jerk or overload the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus the winch cable Never stand in front of the vehicle pension Retighten them if required and torque to the while winching Failure to follow these instructions values specified in the Service Manual can result in serious or fatal injury e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 353 e After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent an accident If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessaty e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
25. Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will discharge the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER IF For vehicles equipped with an optional floor shifter EQUIPPED 1 A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available b For vehicles with a bench seat the cupholder tray can be used to hold the ash receiver H 034805796 EN Optional Floor Shifter 1 Cigar Lighter 2 Ash Receiver 034805613 Ash Receiver and Cigar Lighter Bench Seat 1 Cigar Lighter 2 Ash Receiver 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED A 115 Volt 150 Watts Maximum outlet is located on the center stack of the instrument panel to the right of the radio This outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Playsta tion3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power
26. Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning The transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit NOTE Delayed shifts out of four wheel drive may be experienced due to uneven tire wear low or uneven tire pressures excessive vehicle loading or cold tempera tures 318 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2H Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4H Four Wheel Drive High Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcin
27. For further information on fuses and fuse locations refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle CHAngE OIL Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following proce dure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 17 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi see tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illum
28. Fuel Low e Remote Start Aborted System Fault The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Once the vehicle has started the engine will run for 15 minutes NOTE e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System if equipped Inse
29. In many temperature positions the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side window vel demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions It allows you to stay comfortable while keeping the windshield clear Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE While operating in the other modes the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When in A C mode and the ATC is set to a cool temperature dehumidified air flows through the air outlets If Economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the A C mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A C system NOTE e If the system is in Mix Bi Level or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e I
30. Pull out enough wire 6 Secure to the anchor point Once you have established rope to reach your anchor point Be sure to keep acertain your anchor point secure the tree trunk protector or amount of tension on the wire as it can become twisted choker chain around the object and over wrapped when slackened leading to wire rope damage To prevent losing the end hold the hook strap while you work 8149d10f Tree Trunk Protector 814a0dd8 NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 369 CAUTION Always be certain the anchor you select will with stand the load NOTE How to choose an anchor point A secure anchor is critical to winching operations An anchor must be strong enough to hold while winching Natural an chors include trees stumps and rocks Hook the cable as low as possible If no natural anchors are available when recovering another vehicle your vehicle becomes the anchor point In this case be sure to put the transmission in NEUTRAL apply the hand brake and block its wheels to prevent your vehicle from moving Ideally you ll want an anchor point that will enable you to pull straight in the direction the vehicle will move This allows the wire rope to wind tightly and evenly onto the spooling drum An anchor point as far away as possible will provide the winch with its greatest pulling power 7 Attach the Clevis D shackle and Tree Trunk Protector Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap or chain and through the
31. Refer to the Warranty information book Section 2 1 C Such equipment includes video monitors VCRs heaters stoves refrigerators etc For warranty coverage and service on these items contact the applicable manufac turer Operating instructions for the special equipment in stalled by the conversion camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle If these instructions are missing please contact your authorized dealer for assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the applicable manufacturer For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to www dodgebodybuilder com This website contains di mensional and technical specifications for your vehicle It is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer s technical support For service issues contact your authorized dealer INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the 1 left front corner of the instrument panel visible through VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS the windshield This number also appears on the Auto mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window WARNING on your vehicle the vehicle registration and title Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death Vehicle Identification Number THINGS TO KNOW
32. e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an I authorized dealer immediately Airbag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Light Steering Wheel and Column e nstrument Panel e Knee Impact Bolster Driver Advanced Front Airbag Passenger Advanced Front Airbag 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC WARNING F ide I e Front and Side Impact Sensors e No objects should be placed over or near the e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch airbag on the instrument panel because any such and Seat Track Position Sensors objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate Do not put anything on or around the airbag Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as o determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC damage the airbags and you could be injured which may receive information from the front impact because the airbags may no longer be functional sensors if equipped The protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat The first stage inflator is triggered immediate
33. e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 866 726 4636 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 583 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufact
34. e Four wheel drive low range AWD LOW ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 e Neutral NEUTRAL This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two wheel drive position 2WD for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Refer to Shifting Procedure in this section for specific shifting instructions The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo nents NOTE The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by pressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights 4WD and 4LOW are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection When you select a different transfer case position the indic
35. lated 045632845 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 NOTE A C cannot be deselected when in MAX A C position The LED will blink three times if the A C button is pushed Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped e The Automatic Temperature Control ATC allows both driver and front passenger seat occupants to select individual comfort settings 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL When occupants in the vehicle select an Auto mode operation Auto blower operation is set by using rotary knobs on the control unit and a comfort temperature setting by using the temperature up and down but tons The system provides set and forget operation for op timum comfort and convenience The system can be controlled manually if desired SYNC feature links the temperature controls the pas senger side temperature becomes the same as the temperature selected by the driver The ATC system automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and all passengers 1 jie ow 4 5 tor 6 Dus 8 OO Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 045605681 Blower Control 9 DEFROST Left Temperature Up 10 Right Temperature Down SYNC Indicator 1187 12 A C Indicator 13 SYNC Temperature Button Left Temperature Indicator Right Temperature Indica DELAY Indicator Right Temperature Up MODE 14 Left Temperature Down 15 RECIRCULATE NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INST
36. located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 3 Eie PPP 91 3 Illuminated Vanity Mirror If Equipped 96 O Inside Day Night Mirror 91 O Slide On Rod Features Of Sun Visor If 3 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 92 POWID Ped soc Haws ese HR REEDE oe as 96 O Outside Mirrors 0000 c eee eee 92 D Trailer Towing Mirrors If Equipped ur D Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 93 ll Uconnect Phone If Equipped 98 3 Power Mirrors If Equipped 94 ll Voice Command If Equipped 98 3 Heated Mirrors If Equipped 95 ERA ONS EN N EE OE 99 O Manual Seat Adjuster If Equipped 99 O Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirror If Balie lt a 25 4 ved eG ee PER en qure d oe ees 95 o Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped 100 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie o Adjustable Head Restraints 3 Eight Way Power Seats If Equipped oO Power Lumbar If Equipped o Heated Seats If Equipped O Ventilated Seats If Equipped o 40 20 40 Front Bench Seat If Equipped ll Driver Memory Seat If Equipped O Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE Transmitter To Memory o Memory Position Recall Ls O To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked To MOMO 022 4422 KAREE tpit RACE Sd
37. taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm 538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights if equipped that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments wh
38. that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could NOTE Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as suggest chain breakage Remove the damaged recommended by the chain manufacturer parts of the chain before further use Type S specifications Use Class U chains on 2500 3500 model trucks or other traction aids that meet SAE Type U specifica tions Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 0 5 mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2 vehicles CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle tires or chains observe the following precautions Continued Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave ment Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 415 CAUTION Continued e Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower sug gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacturer These cautions apply to all chain traction devices includ ing link and cable radial chains Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of 4X2 model trucks NOTE e The use of
39. the larger tire should be installed in a front location The correct direction of rotation for dual tire installations must also be observed These dual rear wheels should be tightened as follows 060505400 Tightening Pattern 1 Tighten the wheel nuts in the numbered sequence to a snug fit 2 Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the torques listed in the table Go through the sequence a NN WHAT TODOINEMERGENCIES 491 second time to verify that specific torque has been achieved Retighten to specifications at 100 miles 160 km and after 500 miles 800 km It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued to specifications at all times Torque wheel stud nuts to specifications at each lubrication interval To Stow The Flat Or Spare NOTE Vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels can not be stored under the vehicle because the wheel retainer will not fit through the wheel pilot hole Secure the flat tire in the bed of the truck Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immediately WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and position it properly across the wheel opening For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation stow with the valve stem toward the
40. with integral ignition switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Standard Blade Ignition Key If Equipped Your vehicle may use a standard blade key ignition system The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place You can insert the double sided standard blade key into the ignition switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN If Equipped The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three with detents and one that is spring loaded The detent posi tions are OFF ACC and ON The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When re leased from the START position the switch automatically returns to the ON position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking Wireless Ignition Node WIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON 4
41. AR SR DRR Pe 29 WEG MP 94 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 151 156 SOS ee ee 102 pliding Rear WINdOW seile RE RE RR DE 169 icr P HE 378 379 602 INDEX M DUNMOOL 424464552455 SE EE RO DERE BE DS 149 WiIndOWS hoi EEDE n iem RAS i SEER oe es 34 Power oteenng PIED oos ne qup DE ee oes age 558 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts o1 Pretensioners Seat Dells oe uw wwe bakin mE SU RES RO DE 49 Programmable Electronic Features Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry IDIOT 409 Radial Ply Tires Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap Radio Satellite Uconnect studios Ramp Travel Index Rear Axle Differential Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails Rear Park Sense System Rear Window Features Rear Window Sliding T 270 Reclining Front Seats Recreational Towing 462 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 463 466 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 465 468 Reformulated Gasoline aici oen acera eee eae ds 429 Refrig ara sok aes e qur eoe XR KAR SORT eR gees 617 Reminder Seat Belt iii s wt unos xa 50 Remote Control Di elite leid vedas ae Rd wee Ee Ed DE 25 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 5 sient its 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 276 Remote Stating System sakkie adem DEER RY ves 29 Replacement Keys Lice soe aca Ox vo wd V WW RA E 17 Replacement Paris 2 22 3 93 989 9 3 4 9 9 ER kiei 509 Replacement Ties cdentetGaataneeed means 412 Reporting Safety Defects
42. Axle 2500 3500 Synthetic GL 5 SAE 75W 90 or equivalent Limited Slip 10 5 11 5 inch Models Rear Axles Limited slip additive is not required Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS W Emissions Control System Maintenance 560 H Required Maintenance Intervals W Maintenance Schedule 00 560 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 560 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ee EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your
43. Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following procedure NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position Chrysler Group LLC does not recom mend deactivating the BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 60 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while the seat belt retracts and turn off while re buckling the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s
44. Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or
45. Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale 442 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is import
46. HSA is off Steps 1 through 7 must be completed within 90 seconds to turn off HSA Repeat steps 1 through 7 to re enable HSA functionality 390 STARTING AND OPERATING M EVIC Equipped Vehicles HSA is a Customer Programmable Feature on a EVIC equipped vehicle If you wish to turn off the HSA feature refer to Customer Programmable Features Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Electronic Stability Program ESP If Equipped The ESP system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path 054805602 ESP OFF Switch ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESP TCS Indicator Light 8 The
47. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS The auxiliary 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlets can provide power for in cab accessories designed for use with the standard cigar lighter plug The 12 Volt power outlets have a cap attached to the outlet indicating 12V DC together with either a key symbol or a battery symbol 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the ON RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide power The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is connected to the battery and can provide power at all times NOTE e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following locations e Lower left and lower right of the center stack without floor mounted shifter e Inside the top s
48. Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE e When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho rized dealer e If a programmed Key Fob is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining Key Fobs erased from the system s memory This will prevent the lost Key Fobs from starting your vehicle The remaining Keys Fobs must then be reprogrammed Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm m
49. LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 3 4 Requested by police under a legal warrant Otherwise required by law Data parameters that are recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Vehicle speed Engine RPM Brake switch status Pedal position And other parameters depending on vehicle configuration Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how
50. Light Switch The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or the high beam is selected Interior Lights Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the bottom of the switch is rotated to the far right detent position or if equipped when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way left to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control right brighter or left dimmer When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odom eter radio and overhead console by rotating the control to the right until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day
51. Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will ed illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light located in the instrument cluster will flash on and off for 75 seconds and will remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that affects ra dio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors 6 Loss of
52. Operating for the brake controller is not required roper inspection procedure PESE P P e Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over e When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire 2 000 Ibs 907 kg replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances e Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury e An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically STARTING AND OPERATING 451 NOTE This module is designed for only electric trailer brakes To determine the type of brakes on your trailer WARNING e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing a
53. Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 570 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the Rotate the tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary I Lube the front drive shaft fitting Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary I Inspect exhaust system including Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for isolators damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system including isolators M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 571 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires Replace the engine air cleaner fil
54. Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER RBZ Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting Uconnec
55. Starting Procedures Gas Engines 297 Steering POWER 6 4 AAR Rare SUP be b door 378 379 Wheel Heated x 2h mows wu P pae eo XS 122 Vi Heel Tb s uuu RASTA oaks RSS Bee 121 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound Dy stem CONMOIS 6 4 6 hic ape EERS ya d RR Bo 276 Storage Compartment Center Seat 163 Storage Vehicle sv vasca Y ER isinisi 289 544 Storing Your Vehicle a 43 9 39 39 tear ne EE 544 DUN KOOL ss RD a E Ea 149 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information 413 N INDEX 605 Du Ono Heh ook ob esau 4 eae xs Ss 395 eUe Engine C reran ea PR gen ded 513 System Remote Starting uu ode dene Snpra x r 25 TRONE se 4 46 apin coed ER ERROR A aes 200 iurc PP HM 186 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 283 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 200 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 70 74 Tilt Steering COUR x55 29 cues ia x Sohn 121 dip Id siete ce ek oa eee tea es ea oe ee D ones 297 Tire and Loading Information Placard 402 413 Tire Identification Number TIN 400 Te Mar ES poet cera RA BE DER OR RC ee ae 396 Tire Satety InfOEIAtloD sis uei sa tgp d s 396 dies rm 84 406 586 Agme Lile Ol Ties 554405444404 DRR 54935 411 PG IIOSSUIE 24024295 3850 29 OER SG oe s 406 dr MMC C Hn 414 Did we eee ee eee eet ee 418 489 General Information 44220 EE ERA aed eee 406 EDBIUSpeSd ie DS vae cheers oe ae 408 Inflation Pressures 0 0 00 0000
56. TE m parking lights instrument panel lights cargo lights and fog lights if equipped Headlight Switch Location Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog light if equipped lenses that are lighter and less suscep tible to stone breakage than glass lights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing CAUTION Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses Headlights To turn on the headlights rotate the headlight ZO switch clockwise When the headlight switch is on the parking lights taillights license plate light and instrument panel lights are also turned on To tum off the headlights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch to the A AUTO position 031405773 Automatic Headlight Position When the system is on the Headlight Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF
57. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Multiple Child Restraint Installation Sequence Quad Cab Crew Cab Mega Cab Rear Seats Quad Cab Mega Cab 1 Obtain tether straps by raising the head restraints and reaching between the rear glass and rear seat The tether strap may be retained with an elastic band Accessibility to the tether strap is greatly improved by raising the seat cushion to the up position Remove the elastic before use Head Restraint Adjustment 2 Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and then to the anchor directly behind the center rear seat 3 Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 4 Route each tether strap to the anchor behind the center seat and attach the hooks to the metal ring 5 Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and to the anchor directly behind the right seat 6 Install each child restraint and remove the slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufactur er s instructions cent mere 2 OF Multiple Child Restraint Quad Cab Mega Cab 1 Inner A
58. Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can There are unique electrical systems that must be con cause damage to the vehicle nected to properly assure operator safety and prevent overloading vehicle systems WARNING WARNING Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely affect performance of the airbag system in an acci dent Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described earlier in this manual Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely affect performance of the airbag system in an acci dent Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described earlier in this manual 2500 3500 Models Only Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory CAUTION installed option These packages include components l The Lamp Out indicator could illuminate if exte necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow rior lamps are not properly installed NOTE Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recommended that the owner installer obtain and follow the recommendations contained within the current 460 STARTING AND OPERATING M Before Plowing e Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid level e Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tight ness e Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear The cutting edge should be 1 4 to 1 2 in 6 cm to 1 2 cm above ground in snow plowing position e Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func tioning p
59. VEHICLE 33 To use the system open each rear door use a flat blade WARNING screwdriver or emergency key and rotate the dial to engage and disengage the child protection locks When Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision the system on a door is engaged that door can only be Remember that the rear doors can only be opened opened by using the outside door handle even if the from the outside when the child protection locks are inside door lock is in the unlocked position engaged NOTE e After setting the child protection door lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle 022605852 Child Lock Control 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WINDOWS The control on the left front door panel has UP DOWN switches that give you fingertip control of all power windows There is a single opening and closing switch on the front passenger door for passenger window control and on the rear doors of Quad Cab Mega Cab and Crew Cab models The windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until a front door is opened NOTE The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate f
60. YOUR VEHICLE M 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position To turn the automatic headlights off turn the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode Headlight Delay To aid in your exit your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately 90 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on and then the headlight switch is cycled off Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off or by turning the ignition ON The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features SETUP in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Parking Lights and Panel Lights D To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the parking light symbol To turn off the parking lights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Fog Lights If Equipped The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight switch to the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary control N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 031405775 Fog
61. after the ignition is turned OFF they will extinguish after 15 minutes GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead console and contain one two or three dots lines desig nating the different HomeLink channels NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 TT MT ae WARNING e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety 033906001 features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the HomeLink Buttons Internet at www HomeLink com for safety infor NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu mation or assistance rity Alarm is active Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURE
62. against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit After lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder 518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If a
63. all four road tire pressures to the Light Load Inflation Pressure values as listed on the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label The Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label is located on the rear face of ee STARTING AND OPERATING 427 the driver door Use an accurate tire gauge to check the tire pressures when lowering all four tire pressures After all four tire pressures have been lowered to the Light Load inflation pressures press the tire light load inflation switch If the tire light load inflation switch s amber colored LED turns ON the TPMS is using the light load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning thresh olds If the tire light load inflation switch amber colored LED flashes on and off for 10 seconds after all four tire pressures have been lowered to the Light Load inflation pressures the pressure in any one of the four tires may not be at the light load inflation pressure cold values as indicated for the Light Load condition as defined on the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label located on the rear face of the driver door Using an accurate tire pressure gauge re check the tire pressures for the light load inflation pressure cold value WARNING It is the driver s responsibility to change to the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold condition when not driving in the light load condition as defined as two occupants 150 Ibs 68 kg each plus 200 pounds 9
64. an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode To install a child restraint first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasion ally and pull it tight if necessary Child Restraint Tether Anchor Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for con nection to tether anchors have been available for some tim
65. and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information Fluid Level Check If equipped with a dipstick use the following procedure If your vehicle has a capped dipstick tube it is sealed and 532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M should not be tampered with Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly The fluid level should be checked when the engine is fully warmed up and the fluid in the transmis sion is at normal operating temperature Operation of the transmission with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and of the fluid Check the fluid level whenever the vehicle is serviced Fluid Level Check 42RLE 545RFE Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 82 C 180 F This occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be tween the fingertips To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal 4 Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi tion ending with the lever in PARK Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and not
66. and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton EQUIPPED twice The optional Video Entertainment System VES is i ilable with Every time a preset button is used a corresponding D button number will display e Battery powered two channel remote control Buttons 1 6 e Two r
67. and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535 Washing CAUTION e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or equiva lent or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi e Jf insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug paint and decals and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Special Care Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive and to protect your paint finish Take care never to near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once scratch the paint a
68. begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old engine coolant antifreeze solution N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523 Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information CAUTION Continued Selection Of Coolant e Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further may not be compatible with the engine coolant information CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro antifreeze and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling syste
69. choker 436 Ko ONE OU s eise Tu Gane oe AF 435 Fuel Requirements ien SERE SE se 433 434 Maintenance ees 436 Replacement Parts ne sd 4A PEER HERE 436 DIOR 9 65 AA RA AAR ee ee IR PEOR 436 Flooded Engine Starting us io pee RRRMEREESO ES 298 Fluid Brake 22e Red EE SES ES 558 Pd Capacities quod qoos 3 Sce 3 8 de De HAKE EE 555 Fluid Leaks ass AAR oS ELE EER REKORD RR HE EE 84 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 092 Didke iese EERS eee IEEE A ER D27 Power SIGGE serans RAAR KARRE DERDE 9 9 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 557 Fog LENIS EP 114 214 548 Fold Flat Load Floor lt lt eccese0adeceu4eeu 85 170 Four Wheel Drive eee 316 Four Way Hazard Flasher ssa s ere aere ve 472 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle she admeta taies 496 Front Axle Differential 529 Fuel RETORIESE RES bees 428 ee A ane 437 Snnt seirer ad kaer ai a 226 227 Files Cap Gas Cap 31 934 999093 DR EG 438 Ue 5 2 e N REPE E ERE IRA EE 200 Er Be de hee eee OE OE 208 596 INDEX M tane Rale 2445452450 FQ ERE E RE EVA 428 557 ISGquiremefllS 64442464444 betcha d 428 555 Saver Mode lt c2avece es te nnd EE HOS XS 226 227 Tank C aDOCIDV uua uoa s imc ideo soos ah Di 55b Fuel Flexible See Flexible Fuel Vehicles FHCLOPUNIZEE uud aoeractaca s PORK treed a Ped os 226 Heel DOVE sd wv 2 28 eee ne oe PERS Re 226 Puch System Caution 224 od RARR oh ae e
70. cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the desired location Make sure the cleat is seated in the detent and tighten the nut J 038106531 Adjustible Cleats Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of the detents along either rail in order to keep cargo 4 038106532 properly secure 1 Utility Rail Detent m 2 Cleat Retainer Nut To move the cleat to any position on the rail turn the nut 3 Utility Rail Cleat counterclockwise approximately three turns Then pull 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To remove the cleats from the utility rail remove the end cap by pushing up on the locking tab located on the bottom of the end cap Slide the cleat off the end of the rail Utility Rail End Cap F 038106533 SLIDE IN CAMPERS Camper Applications Certain truck models are not recommended for slide in campers To determine if your vehicle is excluded please refer to the Consumer Information Truck Camper Load ing document available from your authorized dealer For safety reasons follow all instructions in this impor tant document NOTE When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a vehicle an alternate Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL must be provided EASY OFF TAILGATE To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang the tailgate can be removed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera the electrical connector must be disconnected p
71. communication with the tire pressure moni toring sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a non matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly NS TA TING AND OPERATING 423 1 This spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitor ing sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the spare tire 2 If you install the full size spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the IPM Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the full size spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 424 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS Tire Light Load Inflation Swi
72. continu ously during vehicle operation have the system checked by an authorized dealer To Disarm the System Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors and the Vehicle Security Light will flash for 30 seconds Check the vehicle for tampering The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if the vehicle is started with a programmed Sentry Key If an unpro grammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle the engine will run for two seconds and then the alarm will be initiated To exit the alarming mode press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button or start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open the doors This feature is only available if you have Remote Keyless Entry The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignit
73. control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if itis not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever back and forth without first pulling it toward you after you have set it in PARK Make sure it is in PARK before leaving the Continued vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the transmission into PARK remove the key fob from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key fob is removed from the ignition the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle rearward Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is for when the vehicle is standing for pro longed periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle DRIVE This range provides all forward gears including third gear direct and fourth or fifth gear overdriv
74. damage internal parts EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE The equipment Identification Plate is located on the hood inner surface The following information about your vehicle is dis played on this plate Model Wheelbase Vehicle Identifi cation Number Truck Order Number and code numbers with descriptions of all production and special equip ment on the truck as shipped from the factory NOTE Always refer to the Equipment Identification Plate when ordering parts WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS N Hazard Warning Flasher 472 oe iS cise eet as cae edhe He b ensue 492 W Jacking And Tire Changing 472 Wjump Starting Procedures 492 mure Porc oro io P aoa soe Same KOR SY SES 473 O Preparations For Jump Start O Removmg The Spare Tires swan eee HER 478 E Jump Starting Procedure se ge oe RM ER O Prepardhions 2 9 3 e d de AR uen e DIR YR d dS 479 W Freeing A Stuck Vehicle PIINSUUCHONS 5 5455250454626 DER esos 480 Mi Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped 497 o Hub Caps Wheel Covers If Equipped 487 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle 498 AWheel NUL 2 kot 4a em CR dra edo Be esas 488 D Four Wheel Drive Vehicles 498 B To Stow The Flat Or Spare 491 O Two Wheel Drive Vehicles 498 472 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHER JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located
75. depressed while in the delay range the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob is released It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the washer knob is pushed while in the off position the wiper will turn on and cycle approximately three times after the wash knob is re leased To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature Push the washer knob located on the end of the multi function lever inward to the first detent The wipers will cycle one time and automatically shut off to clear road mist or spray from a passing vehicle TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt lever is located on the steering column below the multifunction lever 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the WARNING steering column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the steering column up or
76. down as desired Do not adjust the steering column while driving Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv place ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early Tilt Steering Lever or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm 031605589 The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch bank below the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the heated steering wheel The light on the switch will illuminate to indicate the steering wheel heater is on Pressing the switch a second time will turn off the heated astrogaas steering wheel and light indicator NOTE e The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate e The heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Section 4 f
77. driver is 8 Release the brake pedal not in the vehicle 9 Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle 466 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION WARNING e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position damaged e Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage the internal parts disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking Recreational Towing Procedure Electronic Shift brake should always be applied when the driver is Transfer Case If Equipped not in the vehicle Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts ee STARTING AND OPERATING 467 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 11 Repeat Steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in DRIVE 12 Turn OFF the engine 2 Turn OFF the engine 3 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not start the engine 13 Firmly apply the parking brake 4 Press and hold the brake
78. electric brakes is plugged in the GAIN setting will illuminate 4 Use the GAIN adjustment buttons to increase or decrease the GAIN setting to the desired starting point A GAIN setting of 6 is a good starting point for heavier loads 5 In a traffic free environment tow the trailer on a dry level surface at a speed of 20 25 mph 30 40 km h and squeeze the manual brake control lever completely 6 If the trailer wheels lockup indicated by squealing tires reduce the GAIN setting if the trailer wheels turn freely increase the GAIN setting 454 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below trailer wheel lockup If towing a heavier trailer trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10 EVIC Display Messages The trailer brake control interacts with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display messages along with a single chime will be displayed when a malfunction is determined in the trailer connection trailer brake control or on the trailer Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information of trailer braking There may be a increase in stop ping distance or trailer instability which could result in damage to your vehicle tr
79. feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 64 km h At 40 mph 64 km h the system returns to Partial Off mode described above When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESP system shuts off ESP is 394 STARTING AND OPERATING ee off at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off road driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h The ESP TCS Indicator Light will always be illuminated when ESP is off To turn ESP on again momentarily press the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation ESP Off is the only operating mode for ESP in 4WD LOW Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOCK or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW the ESP system will be in this mode WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESP system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability ESP Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only ESP BAS Warning Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS Warning Light and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON posit
80. fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPM
81. hand 7 Remote Control The remote control provides the interface between the winch operator and the winch The remote control provides the ability to power the winch in out and stop the winch To operate the winch the toggle switch is pressed down to power the winch in and up to power the winch out The winch will stop if the switch is left in the neutral center position CAUTION If not installed the hook strap must be placed on the hook Fairlead The fairlead acts as a guide for the wire rope and minimizes damage to the rope 362 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Winch Accessories The following accessories are necessary to attach the winch to anchors change direction of pull and for safe winching 8149d0ee Gloves Wire rope through use will develop barbs which can slice skin It is ex tremely important to wear protective gloves while oper ating the winch or handling the wire rope Avoid loose fit ting clothes or anything that could become entangled in the wire rope and other mov ing parts 8149d0ea Snatch Block Pulley Used properly the multi purpose snatch block allows you to 1 increase the winch s pulling power and 2 change your pulling direction without damaging the wire rope Proper use of the snatch block is covered in Before You Pull eee STARTING AND OPERATING 363 Clevis D Shackles The Operating Your Winch D Shackle is a safe means of WARNING connecting the loope
82. ignition is turned OFF The lights illuminate at less than 50 of normal intensity If the parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights DRL will turn OFF Also if a turn signal is activated the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle may turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation Once the turn signal is no longer active the DRL lamp will illuminate Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031505789 Turn Signal Lever N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever toward the instru
83. immediately if the Defrost mode is selected or by adjusting the blower control knob and setting the fan to any fixed speed 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features NOTE Each of these features operate independently from each other If any one feature is controlled manually the temperature doors will continue to operate automati cally There are six fixed blower speeds Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the OFF position 045605986 Blower Control The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control knob The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following positions Panel Mode gt gt Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be rotated to regulate or shut off the airflow from these outlets Bi Level Mode ugh Air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets and defrost outlets NOTE
84. impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Additional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If a Deployment Occurs The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deplo
85. in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance If you operate the vehicle using E85 fuel follow the maintenance schedule section of this manual CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability ADDING FUEL The fuel filler cap gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle Open the fuel door and remove the fuel cap by turning it counter clockwise Fuel Filler Cap STARTING AND OPERATING 437 NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap tether
86. indicator message illuminates when you start the engine the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat these steps 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL x Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode Distance To Empty DTE If Equipped N E 725 Average Fuel Economy Fuel Fen nomy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read 0 BUp ag 3 RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history DTE LOLU FUEL information will be erased and the averaging will con tinue from the last fuel average reading before the reset MPG 10 20 SUM The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the Irni s 041009379 average fuel economy in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever MDS if equipped allows the Fuel Saver Mode On engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Distance To Empty DTE Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE ca
87. inside mirror NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in a passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to bz collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex right side mirror wi 030405626 Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Folding Mirror All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either CAUTION forward or rearward to resist damage It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full rearward position to resist damage when entering a car wash or a narrow location 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Mirrors If Equipped The controls for the power mirrors are located on the driver s door trim panel Power Mirror Controls 1 Mirror Select Buttons 030405742 2 Mirror Control Power Mirror Controls The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror press the mirror select button for the mirror that you want to adjust Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move 030405625 Power Mirror Movement
88. is combined with Brake Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out ESP BAS 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a mal function has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible e Transmission Temperature Light This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition such as 4 wheel drive operation e g snow plowing off road operation If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Indicator illuminated will eventually cause se vere transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING In some circumstances a Transmission Temperature Indicator under continued operation could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire e Loose Gascap Indicator If the
89. lever into NEUTRAL to shifting the transmission into PARK eS 13 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch a a oodd 14 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable 8 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure tow bar that there is no vehicle movement 15 Release the parking brake NN STARTING AND OPERATING 465 Returning to Normal Operation Manual Shift 10 Start the engine Transfer Case Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for 11 Press and hold the brake pedal normal usage 12 Release the parking brake 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it con 13 Shift the transmission into DRIVE release the brake nected to the tow vehicle pedal and check that the vehicle operates normally 2 Firmly apply the parking brake WARNING 3 Insert the key fob into the ignition switch and turn it to the ON position but do not start the engine You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the 4 Press and hold the brake pedal NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the 5 Se dhe tranemiesion nto NEUTRAL parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from 6 Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move 7 Shift the t ission into PARK even if the transmission is in PARK The parking EE brake should always be applied when the
90. linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system including Inspect the CV joints isolators Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system including isolators M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 573 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or Schedule 114 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule Rotate the tires LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary J Rotate the tires Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only T Lube the front drive shaft fitting Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet Inspect exhaust system including off road snow plowing or frequent trailer towing isolators Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and al
91. maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi cles GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size 440 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVW
92. may be opened with the inside door handle Power Door Locks If Equipped without lifting the lock plunger A power door LOCK switch is on each front door trim Doors locked before closing will remain locked when panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors closed I The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on your vehicle WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving 29 021805728 Power Door Lock Switch Location 1 Unlock 2 Lock unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If you press the power door LOCK switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking your Key Fob in the vehicle Remov ing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the Key Fob Auto Lock Doors If Equipped If this feature is enabled your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exc
93. may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521 Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not id
94. not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc or if the airbag deployed 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Regular Cab Front Center Three Point Belt 1 The front center seat belt on the Regular Cab may be disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front seats The black latch plate can be detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on the inboard side of the passenger seat Insert the seat belt tongue into the center red slot on the black buckle The black buckle latch plate can be removed when the seat belt tongue is pressed into the buckle Allow the retractor to take up the extra webbing and the buckles will hang vertically from the cab back exit bezel thus freeing up all g the area behind the front seats Detaching Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue 2 To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat pull the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there is an audible click For proper seatbelt usage refer Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING e If the black latch and black buckle are not prop erly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restrain
95. on the WARNING upper switch bank just below the radio Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is OFF NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may discharge your battery vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to an authorized service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 473 Jack Location The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger Seat Removal To access th
96. or sand The vehicle will be less responsive to steering acceleration and braking inputs Therefore you should accelerate slowly leave greater stopping distances and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers You want to keep a slow constant steady pace The key is to maintain the vehicle s momentum e Snow In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4L Low Range if necessary Do not shift to a lower gear than neces sary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth while still applying throttle This will allow the tires to get a fresh bite and help maintain your momentum NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 339 CAUTION e Sand Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure When crossing soft sandy spots On icy or slippery roads do not downshift at high engine RPMs or vehicle speeds because engine brak ing may cause skidding and loss of control e Mud Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through You should use 4L Low Range with a gear low enough to maintain your momentum without shifting If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth for ad
97. overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers are not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you ee STARTING AND OPERATING 433 WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open FLEXIBLE FUEL 4 7L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED E85 General Information iese The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel Ve hicles FFV only These vehicles can be identified by the
98. pedal 14 Shift the transmission into PARK 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL CAUTION 6 Press and hold the transfer case switch NEUTRAL button for four seconds Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in 7 After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light NEUTRAL and the engine running With the transfer comes on release the NEUTRAL button case in NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK 8 Start the engine 9 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 15 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch 10 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure 16 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable that there is no vehicle movement tow bar 468 STARTING AND OPERATING M 17 Release the parking brake NOTE e The transfer case cannot be shifted into NEUTRAL from the 2WD AUTO if equipped position e Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button and must continue to be met until the four seconds elapses and the shift has been completed If any of these require ments are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met during the four second timer then the NEUTRAL indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button is released e The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift
99. roads Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is stuck and the tires are spinning You can damage drivetrain components Lock the rear axle before attempting situations or navigating terrain which could possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck 334 STARTING AND OPERATING ee The locking axles are controlled by the axle locker switch The switch has three positions AXLE UNLOCK REAR LOCK and FRONT REAR LOCK Under normal driv ing conditions the switch should be left in the AXLE UNLOCK position In the AXLE UNLOCK position the front and rear axles are unlocked In the REAR LOCK position the rear axle is locked In the FRONT REAR LOCK position the front and rear axles are locked NOTE Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK position the limited slip differential in the rear axle still provides torque biasing capability for moderate low traction environments During the command to lock the axle the indicator light will flash until the axle is locked After the lock command has been successfully executed the light will remain on solid To lock the rear axle place the vehicle in 4LO Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operat ing for further information Move the axle locker switch position to REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph 5 km h The RR indicator light will remain on when the rear axle is locked NOTE Left to right wheel speed difference may be necessary to a
100. selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift NS TA TING AND OPERATING 325 When the shift is complete the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON 2WD 4WD LOCK Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn ing the control switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either running or off This shift cannot be com pleted if the ignition switch is in the ACC position NOTE The four wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD 4WD LOCK if the front and or rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation the selected position indicator light will flash and the origi nal position indicator light will remain ON At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift 2WD or AWD LOCKS 4WD LOW NOTE When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped You can use either of the following procedures Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine runn
101. selection make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five seconds and retry selection To find the shift require ments refer to the Shifting Procedure for your transfer case located in this section of the owner s manual The SVC 4WD Warning Light monitors the electronic shift four wheel drive system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not function ing properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SVC 4WD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning This could cause damage to driveline components When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Becau
102. shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while completing the shift If difficulty occurs shift the transmission into NEUTRAL hold foot on brake and turn the engine OFF Make shift to the desired mode e Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h e Do not attempt to shift into or from 4L while the transmission is in gear 320 STARTING AND OPERATING Transfer Case Position Indicator Light The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the AWD MO instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front 2WD axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving P y engag 8 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Four Position Switch If Equipped This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch Transfer Case Switch which is located on the instrument panel NEUTRAL 051905705 Transfer Case Switch Four Position This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode positions e Two wheel drive high range 2WD e Four wheel drive lock range AWD LOCK
103. spin your tires faster than an indicated 35 mph 56 km h e Using the Tow Hooks With a Tow Strap Tow straps are a quick and easy way to recover your vehicle from minor situations if you have a secondary vehicle which is not stuck The tow hooks on your vehicle are designed to take the abusive force generated during vehicle recovery Do not use the bumper or any other vehicle component as an attachment point Using tow straps requires coordination between the two drivers Good communication and line of sight are required for a safe recovery First connect the tow strap to the correct attachment points on both vehicles There should be a least 20 to 30 feet between the vehicles to allow for a safe recovery If necessary join two tow straps together using a 1 inch hard wood dowel This will keep the straps from becoming knotted and is safer than using a clevis pin if the strap breaks Next have the tow vehicle backup leaving two to three feet worth of slack in the strap Then the tow vehicle using light throttle should accelerate tightening the strap providing the pulling force needed to free the vehicle The vehicle being recovered should assist in the recov ery at the time of the snap by slowly spinning the tires in the same direction as the pulling vehicle After the vehicle becomes free the driver of the previously stuck vehicle should signal they are free and should hit their brakes stopping both vehicles The driver of the
104. strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants and Small Children Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to the LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower An chors and Tether for Children Rearward facing child s
105. tailgate from the vehicle N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 NOTE Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup box WARNING To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide which is deadly the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with Cap or Slide In Campers should extend beyond the overhanging camper compartment and be free of leaks Locking Tailgate If Equipped The lock is located next to the tailgate handle The tailgate can be locked using the vehicle key UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS la Instrument Panel Features 195 W Switch Bank Button Description 196 AUpper owth Dank AA AE eb AA ae ORE 196 B Lower Switch Dank 52i RR RERS 196 B Instrument Cluster Base 198 B Instrument Cluster Premium 199 W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 200 ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC IR EQUIPPeO sa soas 4G brea dedu ge d For 217 DEVICE Displays io occ d acd oan sen eee O Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode Distance To Empty DTE If Equipped E Trip EUNEKONS os s pede Ae Goa ores P o Vehicle Info Customer Information Features 228 BIED sae ans oe RR SA DRA oe He 229 i9 RP HC 230 O Compass Temperature Display 230 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se o Customer Programmable Features System H Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD sae or Gt h
106. the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone lf Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI 0 5 IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with uconnect For sales code RER RBZ REN REP REW RB2 or REZ touch screen radio UCI feature refer to the separate RER REN RBZ RB2 or REZ User s Manual UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows an iPod to be plugged into the vehicle s sound system through a 16 pin connector using the provided interface cable UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the UCI features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e Ifthe radio has a USB port connecting an iPod to this port does not pl
107. the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear bumper and the detected obstacle when backing up Refer to ParkSense System Usage and Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 ParkSense will remember the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the RUN ON position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will be active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will be active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orientation of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Dis
108. time Refer to Seats Eight Way Power Seat in this section for further information 3 Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions 4 Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets up to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set 5 Adjust the Automatic Temperature Control ATC while the ATC is in Auto mode 6 Press and release the SET button located on the driver s seat 7 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 or 2 on the driver s seat The next steps must be 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M performed within 10 seconds if you desire to also use a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions 8 Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key 9 Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE transmitters 10 Repeat the above steps to set the next memory position using the other numbered memory button or to link another RKE transmitter to memory Memory Position Recall NOTE e The vehicle must be in PARK to recall the memory positions e Not all motors may be moved at one time Refer to the Seats Eight Way Power Seat in this section for fur ther information To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver s seat or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s seat or the UNLOCK butto
109. tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer N F Y OU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 585 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Buil
110. to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing e The flashing NEUTRAL indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met Returning to Normal Operation Electronic Shift Transfer Case Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it con nected to the tow vehicle 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Insert the key fob into the ignition switch and turn it to the ON position but do not start the engine 4 Press and hold the brake pedal 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 6 Press and hold the transfer case switch NEUTRAL button for one second ee STARTING AND OPERATING 469 7 After the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off release NOTE the NEUTRAL button e Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met 8 After the NEUTRAL button has been released the prior to pressing the transfer case NEUTRAL button VE e il l transfer case will shift to the position identified by the anus ed EE one pues and the shift has been completed If any of these selector switch requirements are not met prior to pressing the NEU 9 Shift the transmission into PARK TRAL button or are no longer met during the one second time then all of the mode position indicator ge neha DEL peak l
111. under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to c
112. vehicle diagnostic system determines 5 y installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the telltale display area Tighten that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Oil Change Due Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Due message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the RETURN button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position NOTE If the
113. vehicle in a level Continued position The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the fill hole for the manufacturer s C205F HD front 530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M axles The fluid level should be 5 8 in 16 mm below the fill hole on 9 1 4 in manufacturer s rear axles For all 2500 3500 Model axles the fluid level should be 1 4 1 4 in 6 4 mm 6 4 mm below the fill hole on the 9 25 in front and 3 4 in 1 4 in 19 mm 6 4 mm on 10 5 in rear axles The 11 5 in rear axle level should be 1 4 in 1 4 in 6 4 mm 6 4 mm below the fill hole Drain and Refill Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information NOTE The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in corrosion and possible failure of differential components Operation of the vehicle in water as may be encountered in some off highway types of service will require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage Limited Slip Differentials This vehicle requires that 4 oz 118 ml MOPAR Limited Slip Additive or equiva lent be added to the gear lubricant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information The MOPAR Limited Slip Additive or equivalent should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is made 2500 3500 Model Axles DO NOT REQUIRE any
114. vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 561 NOTE The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your
115. vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in unnecessary cost There fore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emission control system Continued 432 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION Continued Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
116. wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
117. wheel nuts to final torque in increments Progress around the bolt circle tightening the wheel nut opposite to the wheel nut just previously tightened until final torque is achieved Recommended torques are shown in the fol lowing chart Disc Type Nut Stud Size Torque Wheels Ft Lbs Cone 9 1618 120 150 160200 Flanged 9 1618 10160 190 220 8 Stud Dual Rear Wheels Dual wheels are flat mounted and center piloted The lug nuts are a two piece assembly When the tires are being rotated or replaced clean these lug nuts and add two drops of oil at the interface between the hex and the washer WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 489 Oiling Location Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the inner and outer wheels Align these slots when assem bling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the inner wheel The tires of both dual wheels must be completely off the ground when tightening to ensure wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping 490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Dual wheel models require a special heavy duty lug nut tightening adapter included with the vehicle to cor rectly tighten the lug nuts Also when it is necessary to remove and install dual rear wheels use a proper vehicle lifting device NOTE When installing a spare tire as part of a dual rear wheel end combination the tire diameter of the two individual tires must be compared If there is a significant difference
118. you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Center Lap Belts The center seating position for the Quad Cab Mega Cab and Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only To fasten the lap belt slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click To lengthen the lap belt tilt the latch plate and pull To remove slack pull the loose end of the webbing Wear the lap belt snug against the hips Sit back and erect in the seat then adjust the belt as tightly as is comfortable 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous e A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down and under the belt in a collision e A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash forces to the abdomen not to the stronger hip bones In either case the risk of internal injuries is greater Wear a lap belt low and snug Automatic Locking Retractor ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode any time a child safety seat is installed in a passenger seating position Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How To En
119. you power in make sure the wire rope winds evenly and tightly on the drum This prevents the outer wire wraps from draw ing into the inner wraps binding and damaging the wire rope Avoid shock loads by using the control switch intermittently to take up wire rope slack Shock loads can momentarily far exceed the winch and wire rope ratings During side pulls the wire rope tends to stack up at one end of the drum This stack can become large enough to cause serious damage to the winch So line up pulls as straight ahead as possible and stop winching if the wire rope comes close to the tie rods or mounting plate To fix an uneven stack spool out that Using The Remote Control 374 STARTING AND OPERATING ee section of the rope and reposition it to the opposite end of the drum which will free up space for continued winching 16 Secure vehicle Once recovery of the vehicle s is complete be sure to secure the vehicle s brakes and put the transmission in PARK Release tension in the wire rope 17 Disconnect the wire rope and disconnect from the anchor 18 Rewind the wire rope The person handling the wire 81424738 rope should walk the rope in and not let it slide through the hand control the winch at all times WARNING To prevent serious injury NEVER put your fingers inside the hook area as you are powering in NOTE How to spool under no load Arrange the remote control lead so it cannot be caught in th
120. 05603 310 STARTING AND OPERATING xe 051205622 Console Shift Lever On vehicles equipped with 4 7L or 5 7L engines use of ERS or TOW HAUL mode also enables an additional underdrive gear which is not normally used during through gear accelerations This additional gear im proves vehicle performance and cooling capability when towing a trailer on certain grades In ERS mode first through third gear are underdrive gears and fourth gear is direct drive ERS fifth gear Overdrive is the same as the normal fourth gear When in the DRIVE position in first through fourth gear the first tap down will display the ERS designation for the current gear the transmission will not downshift For example if you are in DRIVE and are in third direct gear when you tap the shift lever switch one time in the direction the display will show 4 ERS 4 is direct gear Another tap down will shift the transmission down to ERS 3 the added underdrive gear When in the DRIVE position in fifth gear the first tap down will downshift the transmission and display 5 ERS 5 is the same as normal fourth gear Another tap down will shift the transmission down to ERS 4 direct gear To exit ERS mode press and hold the shift lever switch in the position until D is once again highlighted in the instrument cluster display WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The dri
121. 1 kg of cargo The vehicle Light Load Definition is found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label lo cated on the rear face of the driver door Failure to do so may cause you to lose control resulting in an accident causing serious or fatal injury To switch back to the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold press the tire light load inflation switch It is not necessary to first fill the tires to the max load inflation pressure cold values to switch the TPMS system to the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold If after pressing 428 STARTING AND OPERATING M the tire light load inflation switch and tire pressures are below the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning thresholds the TPMS low pressure warning telltale light located in the instrument cluster will turn ON and a chime will sound The tire pressures are now required to be inflated to the max load inflation pressure cold values described on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label The Tire and Loading Information label is located on the drivers side B pillar If the tire light load inflation switch LED turns OFF the TPMS has been reset and the TPMS is using the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning thresholds General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions
122. 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is in process the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is ON until all requirements have been met NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM 2500 MODELS ONLY IF EQUIPPED This vehicle is equipped with electronically locking front and rear differentials These differentials when engaged mechanically lock together the axle shafts forcing the wheels to spin at an equal rate This allows the vehicle to maintain its momentum and prevents it from becoming stuck The locking front and rear differentials should only be engaged during low speed extreme off road situa tions where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with the ground It is not recommended to drive the vehicle with the differentials locked on pavement due to the reduced ability to turn and speed limitations CAUTION e Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard surfaced roads The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced and damage to the drivetrain may occur when the axles are locked on hard surfaced
123. 13 Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others 27 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for six to 9 eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 28 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 29 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti lock Brake System ies ABS The light will turn on when the ignition sw
124. 2 lt tiiigasaeenseeeida 378 O Power Steering Fluid Check so oe nnn 379 ke ees El OE OE EE keris 380 MERE oi OE ee thes ARE EE 381 o 3500 Dual Rear Wheel Models Only D Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System N Electronic Brake Control System o Anti Lock Brake System ABS 3 Traction Control System TCS If Equipped O Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped o Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped O Electronic Stability Program ESP If Equipped o Trailer Sway Control TSC If Equipped W Tire Safety Information D Tire Markings D Tire Identification Number TIN 204 STARTING AND OPERATING ee O Tire Terminology And Definitions 401 W Supplemental Tire Pressure Information If O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 402 eee s N Tires General Information 406 si ee eee ge gone ee ee ee ind rive Duae Lo eee ee ce LT 406 NM no Tre oe ooh 3 1x S svp E a ERE aa 416 MUERE NEU BERNER 407 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 416 H Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 408 ELE WEE aas Ga SEER eqns IE ORadial Ply Tires isses 409 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 419 lede Spare ll Equipped wind vous 409 H Tire Pressure Monitor System Components 421 H Tire Spinnin A10 D Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS Tire ep EA EE oS Light Load Inflation Switch Description 2500 O Tread Wear Indicators 411 Models If Equipped
125. 205588 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Door Storage Rear Door Storage Crew Cab Storage compartments are located in both the driver and Front Door Storage If Equipped passenger door trim panels Storage areas and bottle holders drivers side only are located in the door trim panels 035205819 035205815 Rear Door Storage Front Door Storage UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 WARNING Center Storage Compartment If Equipped The center storage compartment is located between the driver and passenger seats The storage compartment e This armrest is not a seat Anyone seated on the provides an armrest and contains both and upper and armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle lower storage area Operation or an accident Only use the center seating position when the armrest is fully upright In an accident the latch may open if the total weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs 4 5 kg These items could be thrown about en dangering occupants of the vehicle Items stored should not exceed a total of 10 lbs 4 5 kg 73 m Ld EF CA A 035305806 Center Storage Compartment 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to With the upper lid closed pull on the lower handle to raise the cover The upper storage area contains a 12 Volt open the lower storage bin power outlet that can be us
126. 281 287 Delay Intermittent Wipers amp u ia does mh ores 120 Differential Limited Slip sies RR EREREE ES 999 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission lesse 292 LOU CUON cone oad upra ote Gare Var d died 379 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 025 Door ode sae cd s coq doe 9 Reb S tpe eg d as 28 Door Opener Carde ss vs URE 9 Pace ES ea 142 Driving OH Pavement 44 lt 04ebeseu046 ELE HR bees 335 Sin P a a 335 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Waler n 354 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy 226 Dual Rear Wheels 00 418 489 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 274 ES Fuel siu 545s SEER EIE PS eke Ge es 433 Electric Rear Window Defrost 168 Electrical Power Outlets 594 INDEX M Electronic Brake Control System 384 Anti Lock Brake System urea PRE gages 384 Brake Assist Systemi sosi ord den Rae S prs 386 Electronic Stability Program si m 390 Traction Control Systemi a uev obse EN vues 385 Electronic Range Select ERS 309 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 125 Electronic Stability Program ESP 390 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC onse ea nee REDDER we 199 217 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case 320 326 Emergency Brake as 827440 EER ache daw xs 380 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 496 Hazard Warning Flasher
127. 5 407 Lite E Wes oes ee eta a oie cee hae fase 411 L ad A apaderD 24424 aon X sees 6 5 HA es 402 403 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 419 Pressure Warning Lie 2204044444464 tis 211 So LEen ue OAAR RE veas et sees 586 cei Cm 409 Replacement ie x sways OG e d e sepa DER d 412 old ODE RE AR EES ER SR ee qo en od DRA 416 ic M base eae teen 396 406 p LETT 398 viu M liio rr 416 OPE d be ees ye eave seed HARP 410 Tread Wear Indicators sus ie ode eem EE 411 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 446 Torque Converter Clutch 606 INDEX aaa Id Tow Hooks Emergency 4 24 44249244465 ER AG 497 TOWING senate eee eee aoa ee ae RES ae 441 Disabled Vehicle s os aas DEER ERG AE 498 Con MESSE N uu ee eee eae OE EIS 446 Keer lt 2 dos acs a Put x oC a d exe qoe d Ve 462 ro PE HE ER EE DEER EE 446 dae xus ure s Exon URGES REEDE a eee 354 Traction Control 24s 404 eR RRERERXS 203 385 Trailer Sway Control ISC aoe vore yore x wd ari 395 Trader TOWING aaa doped mrt ES HEESE RR 441 CODI Systemi TIPS osa ure RUE KORT itini 458 lelie MAA RR OT ET OE EE 445 Mmimum Requirements auus mn u nasa s 447 WHETOUS 2o uc diee aes PvE hea eee ene yes 97 Trailer and Tongue Weight 4 2 5 2 446 VIS scc ESME OS RA ER HE OE en 455 Trailer Towing Guide s o 44445044 24465654 446 Toler WEI IE ay kos bere oe ch eee te pees os 446 ran ier Case Pm 530 Blectromically Shifted 2 5 dioe RR AS 320 326 l mu
128. AL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting into any driving range NOTE This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift interlocking system The brake pedal must be pressed to shift out of PARK Tip Start Feature Do not press the accelerator Turn the ignition switch briefly to the START position and release it The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disen gage when the engine is running 298 STARTING AND OPERATING M If Engine Fails To Start WARNING Continued If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergen
129. BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS HA Word About Your Keys 12 o Wireless Ignition Node WIN IP Eotipped lt lt arawas portaa eros er uci 12 ARY FOD OE OE EE EER 13 O Removing Key FOB From Ignition 14 HE ey In lenitioir Reminder v 05 see ee dou ede 15 IN onus MERE EE ean yee ward 15 O Replacement Keys said x RE EER VEE 17 O Customer Key Programming 17 O General Information lessen ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped EL Rearming Of The System ss oue sb xac das ETo Set The Alam auus or 4 8 eee habe es Hie Disarm The System esce eR eS B illuminated Entry If Equipped lll Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped Oio Unlock The Doots iss exe o To Lock The Doors 23 vex xa dace TES 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M O Remote Open Window Feature If Equipped o Using The Panic Alarm O Programming Additional Transmitters 24 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 24 O General Information 25 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 25 da Mow To Use Remote Start sasies sie ees 26 W Door LOCKS 4 4 os ay Ce eg donc 28 o Manual Door LOCKS iuo SEE yc 28 O Power Door Locks If Equipped 29 o Child Protection Door Lock ss be ER UR s 32 la Windows EE SE ss ee 34 O Power Windows If Equipped 34 VV ING DUO HD us ecu ebd ede dot BOE S ew ee OE 37 W Oc
130. Brake GVSIG ece ee REEDE EP S ER ae DE 381 527 Anti Lock ABS zoe ir DAE ep 382 384 Fluid Check uoo 444 a56588 be bes 527 Master amp VIE scan pas bau 9 puce oot EER 027 POPKING eee 380 Weare DISP site ace KEER eens oa ee 209 Brake Transmission Interlock 301 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 79 BUIDKEDIACCINCME sos aie sace pea acdsee 545 bele Li kun tao eee vers OE os ous ey di 84 545 Cab Top Clearance Lighis uate inea KAR as on 551 Calibration Compass a4 expe X xr RE E SOR 25 Camera Rear a 138 EL ges SALARIOS M E ae Be SESS 186 Capacities Fluid 2643 6653 0555 PEER EE Ee DOD Caps Filler Oil Engine 592 INDEX aaa Id POWer SISSE nec co RE PRETI ene types tess 379 Radiator Coolant Pressure 524 Cat c ul M DOD Carbon Monoxide Warning 81 432 8 ad euoacebuney s sa oe bey eae E ete 8 117 Cellar Mile PE 98 Center High Mounted Stop Light 550 Center Lap Deus 24464 doe d ARS eee ae oR aes s 47 Center Seat Storage Compartment 163 Cer ficaton Label a sc cse ue so newer died N oie 439 Cham Mite SIZ op Rea oe O59 ORE BG Een 398 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 213 508 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 80 CREEKS Saloy APT 80 Child Restraint uc 044296533 VEG Eo 34 66 67 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 70 74 CIC Seal 2544 o6 644 ES EO
131. Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 575 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road snow plowing or frequent trailer towing Inspect exhaust system including isolators Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system including isolators Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 576 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ee 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Serv
132. D CAPACITIES Fuel Approximate 1500 Regular Cab Shortbed Crew Quad Cab Models 1500 Regular Cab Longbed Crew Quad Cab Models Optional 4 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 30 API Certified For 2500 3500 trucks operating under a gross combined weight rating greater than 14 000 lbs 6 350 kg U S 26 Gallons 32 Gallons 34 Gallons 35 Gallons 5 Quarts 6 Quarts 7 Quarts 7 Quarts Metric 121 Liters 129 Liters 132 Liters 556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx U S Metric eee MEE ed 3 7L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 14 Quarts 13 Liters 4 7L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 l 5 7L Engine 1500 Models MOPAR Antifreeze 16 Ouar 15 Liters Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 5 7L Engine 2500 3500 Models MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or 18 7 Quarts 17 7 Liters equivalent 5 7L Engine 2500 3500 Models w Heavy Duty MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 19 2 Quarts 18 2 Liters Formula or equivalent N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler
133. EAT IF EQUIPPED Driver memory seats allow the driver to recall settings for the adjustable pedals mirrors seats and the radio presets using the key fob The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard side of the drivers seat cushion 031105757 Memory Seat Buttons The memory buttons 1 and 2 can be programmed to recall the driver s seat position driver s outside mirror position adjustable brake accelerator pedals position Automatic Temperature Control ATC temperature set ting and radio station preset settings Your Remote N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Keyless Entry RKE transmitters can also be pro grammed to recall the same positions when the UN LOCK button is pressed NOTE The power lumbar option is not programmable with driver memory seats Your vehicle was delivered with two RKE transmitters One or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory position The memory system can accommodate up to two RKE transmitters each RKE transmitter linked to either of the two memory positions Setting Memory Positions and Linking RKE Transmitter to Memory NOTE Each time the S SET button and a numbered button 1 or 2 are pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store new settings 1 Turn the vehicle key to the ON RUN position 2 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and both sideview mirrors to the desired positions NOTE Not all motors may be moved at one
134. EHICLE 23 Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least four seconds but no longer than ten seconds Then press the PANIC button while still hold ing the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Remote Open Window Feature If Equipped This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time To use this fe
135. EMENT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No Overhead Console Lamps 15 2122 Dome Lamp xe hows Kae OE we WER De ee dy Ve 7679 NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb No BACKUP EET 921 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 221 Los kans soene SR sae Soe goer adh ees 9145 Dial Heidi HE o oc s man san B ox owen a Ge H13 Quad Headlamp Low Beam H11 Quad Headlamp High Beam 9005 Side Marker Dual Headlamp 3157K Side Marker Quad Headlamp 3157NA Rear License Plate Lamp i sos o ed e a 194 Rear Caro LA se be READ ee oe ey dran 921 Rear Toi Tura and Stop 9 2 as dem RR 3157K Cab Roof Marker Lamps 194NA Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Lamp 194 Side Marker Lamps Dual Rear Wheels 194 BULB REPLACEMENT Dual or Quad Headlamp Front Park and Turn Signal If Equipped 1 Open the hood 2 Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable 3 Remove the four plastic push in fasteners that secure the upper radiator seal to the grille support and both fender ledges 546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4 Remove the two plastic push in rivets that secure the 7 Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front upper radiator seal to the radiator wheel remove the fas
136. ES Radios Only D System Activation O Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID O Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode O Satellite Antenna H Reception Quality O Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode O Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped li Video Entertainment System VES If EQUIDPCO RE EE EA ll Remote Sound System Controls I BOUIDPCG 213 4 2 92 REED AS RARR DRAERS DE o Radio Operation EE DEI eE ao BROER EIER ses B CD DVD Disc Maintenance 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 278 W Climate Controls oes rem mmy 278 O Manual Heating And Air Conditioning DEU PPP 278 o Automatic Temperature Control ATC If IEXGUIDDEO sies oue Pre oe ER EDE d 283 D Summer Operation ss vau se tae boda da 288 ED Winter Operation 44 05 45sn9 bauso aes 288 EPVACQUONT OLIE ask oon DR RA ee ee IE 289 o Window Fogging And Frosting 289 O Outside Air Intake augus dh ure DRR EE ES 289 Operate MS sasies a dca Sand tone d abs 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES I n HOA 6 OE 9 OE O O40105708 1 Headlight Switch 7 115v Power Inverter Outlet 13 Transfer Case Position Switch 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Power Outlet 14 Ignition Switch 3 Radio 9 Lower Switch Bank 15 Hood Rele
137. ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions STARTING AND OPERATING 391 WARNING e ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents e The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has multiple operating modes depend ing on vehicle type Two Wheel Drive 2WD or Four Wheel Drive 4WD Four wheel drive vehicles may be equipped with either a four mode position ZWD 4WD LOCK AWD LOW NEUTRAL or a five mode position 392 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 2WD 4WD AUTO AWD LOCK AWD LOW NEUTRAL transfer case If you have a four wheel drive vehicle and want to determine which transfer case is on your vehicle and how to o
138. GS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your WARNING abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across n your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in a vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immedi ately and have it fixed Removing Slack From Belt NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor WARNING will withdraw any slack in the belt A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle leave ur with no protection Inspect the belt system The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position periodical Creche op eu oor Oe part If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do
139. GS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury WARNING Improper installation can lead to fail
140. GTW towable for your given drive train All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings NOTE For additional trailer towing information in cluding maximum trailer and tongue weight rating for your vehicle refer to the following website addresses e http www dodge com bodybuilder e http www dodge ca Canada Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents ee STARTING AND OPERATING 447 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading In formation Placard in Starting and Op
141. IEM 00 a a m GE v MIT QE CS vd e MI 4WD BRAKE mige 2n MEAN WeMDOW ELFZTESCALL PAN LIGTE WEAR FOO LAMP AL DEFWOST AMD VENTILATING PAM WIP DZRWADICR ROTE FORM WEED a oet HL DEFROST HEATED l OPEN LOWEN AA OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE 7 70 q wv J ho N tow DE poU HAUL BATTERY ise ATET dnte ua TE ad tre AAT li Lipi JOM pad Am CONDITA CHALD SEAT ini cecmirio Puch TERN i AL OHAFGINS TETHEN ARTHA e 40 A i OO CA C Low LOWE ANDREAS iW FLUR PORER VESEL KI WEER DOE URBAG BLIDING DOOD UM LOKTEN ANU TETHER EON UcNMECIT HAZARD EDU WHEEL STEERING FLUO AUD AE CHPLEREN LATCH BITTIDA DTE LA CY e E RIRERG qap d 1i F 2 PUSH OFF MALFUMCTION SHINE COGLANT Sumi EMEHTAL PASSENHGNE DERE ALIAM CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE BEE DERE MH ELEtTEDNIE INIBCATDA Lec oll TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRANMTHYEZTEM ATFEAG OFF TOF DOWN TON HE MARA FA TXONDITIDHER READ EF CDNTBERN DEF n10507683 6 INTRODUCTION M WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VAN CONVERSIONS CAMPERS The Manufacturer s Warranty does not apply to body modifications or special equipment installed by van conversion camper manufacturers body builders
142. If Equipped O Shifting Procedure O Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Five Position Switch If Equipped O Shifting Procedure W Axle Locker System 2500 Models Only If edeles 22 299 EN ET WE IE EX TE ll Safe Off Road Driving Power Wagon On i x x dug ti tkrk tpat O Off Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics 3 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand O Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High POMS soa a Eh oh Se eee EORUM RA REDE 340 EPLBIE CUMING 44484554053 ERR e DRA oe 342 O Driving Through Water oa asse BERE sis 345 O Airing Down For Off Road Driving 347 A Vehicle RGCOVElY a asse hbase ode tance 348 DL After Driving Off Road so ses be REG 352 N Limited Slip Differential 959 N Driving On Slippery Surfaces 354 Bl Driving Through Water 354 O Flowing Rising Water 4 usa 204 deter es 955 O Shallow Standing Water 355 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 E Off Road Driving Tips 00 297 B After Driving OI Road spreci ei aus eae 307 Mi Winch Usage Power Wagon Only If EPP e lt 0 o04 8 9t aoe x OR EQ ea oes 358 D Things To Know Before Using Your Winch 358 O Understanding The Features Of XOHP WIC reese ieres end Bae ag Y ue d 360 BWC ACCES SONE oe EL DRR BA eee ee 362 O Operating Your Winch lt lt caua doeet ye dare 363 E Rigcine Tecamiques a a usas saec dys read 376 IM Power Steering s
143. Incline If at all possible avoid driving across an incline If it is necessary know your vehicle s abilities Driving across an incline places more weight on the down hill wheels which increases the possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover Make help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires NS TA TING AND OPERATING 345 WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle which may result in severe injury Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE Never back down a hill in NEU TRAL using only the vehicle brakes Never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down Driving Through Water Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible manner You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment You should know your vehicle s abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it Determine i
144. Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multi Displacement System MDS Re fer to Multi Displacement System in Starting and Operating for further information N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513 Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used NOTE For 2500 3500 trucks with a 5 7L engine oper ating under a gross combined weight rating of 14 000 lbs 6 350 kg or greater SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recom mended for all operating temperatures Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are fol
145. LODGE som Ram Truck __ OWNER S MANUAL o m O REEDE e e Ls Le INTRODUCTION sit ees Be n ER WK RE eae ea ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING sesse ss see sesse TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B Introduction INTRODUCTION B How To Use This Manual Mi Warnings And Cautions 4 W Van Conversions Campers 4 Vehicle Identification Number 6 W Vehicle Modifications Alterations 4 INTRODUCTION See INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicl
146. Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 20 High Beam Indicator ED This indicator shows that headlights are on high beam Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 21 Voltmeter When the engine is running the gauge indicates the electrical system voltage The pointer should stay within the normal range if the battery is charged If the pointer moves to either extreme left or right and remains there during normal driving the electrical system should be serviced NOTE The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at various engine temperatures This cycling operation is caused by the post heat cycle of the intake manifold heater system The number of cycles and the length of the NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 cycling operation is controlled by the engine control module Post heat operation can run for several minutes and then the electrical system and voltmeter needle will stabilize 22 Cargo Light The cargo light will illuminate when the cargo od light is activated by pressing the cargo light gt bu
147. Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil For 2500 3500 trucks operat Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements ing under a gross combined nc rating of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil greater than 14 000 lbs 6 350 kg filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or Spark Plugs 3 7L Engine ZFR6F 11G Gap 0 043 in 1 09 mm Spark Plugs 4 7L Engine Upper Bank FR8TE2 Gap 0 039 in 99 mm Lower Bank FR811332 Gap 0 051 in 1 30 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 09 mm Fuel Selection 3 7L and 4 7L Engines Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended 558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE m Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Transfer Case MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Transfer Case NVG 246 Onl MOPAR NVG 246 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Front Axle 1500 Four Wheel Drive GL 5 SAE 75W 90 MS 9763 or equivalent Models Rear Axle 1500 Models MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W 140 MS 8985 Limited Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 118 ml 4 oz MOPAR Limited Slip Additive or equivalent Front and Rear
148. NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been trained the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 6 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is comp
149. OLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in
150. ON gt 3500 Dual Rear Tires have only one approved direc tion of rotation This is to accommodate the asym cz metrical design tread pattern of the On Off Road tire and the use of Outline White Letter OWL tires e When replacing a flat the spare tire may have to be remounted on the rim or installed at a different ES location to maintain the correct placement of the EF tire on the wheel relative to the tire wheel position on the truck For example if the spare is used to 055705948 replace an outer rear tire it will have to be re Tire Rotation mounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be inward That way the tread design of asymmetrical matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set tires and the white writing of the OWL tires will To check if tires are even lay a straight edge across all maintain proper position four tires The straight edge should touch all the tires NS TA TING AND OPERATING 419 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire inflation placard pressure The placard pressure is defined on the Tire and Loading Information label The Tire and Loading Information label is located on the drivers side B pillar The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi mately 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C
151. PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE 90 gt vol 00 il 110 m 040305552 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM KIALA gt 50 60 79 40 a 100 aid 80 30 MPH 90 au 61 00 LN 10 040307695 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer The tachometer indicates engine speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM CAUTION Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer at high RPM for extended periods Engine damage may occur 2 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated NOTE e A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on e Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator remains on and does not flash or flashes at a rapid rate 3 Fuel Gauge Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON position 4 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMEN
152. PM 540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Bat Presafe 1 J09 30 Amp Bat Plg Electric CM2200 Pink Bat Trailer Tow J10 40 Amp Green bat Passenger Door J11 30 Amp Node Pink Brake Bat L Bar Off Road Bat Sway Thatchum Rear Doors Bat Rad Fan 1 2 SSR Bat Folding Seat PZEV Bat IOD Main Frt HVAC Motor J13 60 Amp Bat H Lamp Wash Yellow MTV CM2200 Elec J14 40 Amp Vac Pump Green Bat Driver Door J15 60 Amp Yellow Bat DICM Axle J16 40 Amp Locks Green Bat ABS Pump m JA2 40 Amp mE Starter Solenoid mE Bat ABS Valve Green MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fus Fuse Fuse Fuse 17 25 Amp Bat Sunroof M25 10 Amp Bat J1962 Diag Natural Skylight Red Mirrors M26 10 Amp Bat Ign Sw WIN Red PASS Ign R ACC M27 15 Amp Bat CHMSL Brake Sunroof Window Sw Blue Sw 18 uu we Natural Blue a Yellow Natural Yellow Safe 2 Yellow Yellow HGM Yellow P2 23 M24 EE Illum M28 10 Amp Bat Corax TPM 20 25 Amp Frt Wiper Red PEM HVAC Htr Natural Pump 542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fus Fuse Fuse Fuse 15 Amp Bat NGC EATX M41 15 Amp IOD SDARS VES Blue PCM Blue 2 3 DVD HFM 15 Amp Bat CCN Interior UGDO
153. Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to turning the key fob to the LOCK position The key fob can only be removed from the ignition switch when the ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to any other switch position ACC ON or START engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override Column Shifter If Equipped There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical system malfunction occurs e g dead battery 1 Turn the key fob to the ACC or ON position without starting the engine 2 Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position 3 Firmly set the parking brake 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 302 STARTING AND OPERATING 5 Using a screwdriver or other suitable tool press and Center Console Shifter If Equipped hold the override tab through the access port ringed There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move circle on the bottom of the steering column the shift lever out of the PA
154. R has not been exceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle Weigh ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate ee STARTING AND OPERATING 441 CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing
155. RK position if an electrical system malfunction occurs e g dead battery To access the override use a flat bladed screwdriver to carefully remove the override cover which is located on the right of the shift lever gate 1 Turn the key fob to the ACC or ON position without starting the engine 2 Firmly set the parking brake 3 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 4 Using the screwdriver press and hold the override tab through the access port on the center console Interlock Manual Override 6 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL Interlock Manual Override 5 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 6 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 7 Reinstall the override cover STARTING AND OPERATING 303 Four Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped NOTE Under extremely cold temperatures 6 F 21 C and when in DRIVE transmission operation may be briefly limited to only second gear operation Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the shift lever between these gears Gear Ranges Do not race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear range
156. RUMENT PANEL 285 Automatic Operation 1 Position the MODE control knob to the Auto position on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Position the BLOWER control knob in the Auto posi tion on the ATC Panel 3 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front passenger temperature buttons Once the desired tem perature is displayed the system will achieve and auto matically maintain that comfort level 4 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features SETUP in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the ATC display until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode and DELAY will no longer be illuminated in the display The blower will engage
157. S cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded Continued 384 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued e The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA Electronic Stability Program ESP and Trailer Sway Control TSC All of the systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESP Anti Lock Brake System ABS The ABS aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for fur
158. S OF YOUR VEHICLE M Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds The EVIC will display CLEARING CHAN NELS Release the buttons when the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal It is also advised to park outside the garage while training 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED Then release both the HomeLink and handheld trans mitter buttons If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the handheld transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
159. S pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result NOTE The TPMS telltale is also accompanied by a Low Tire message in the odometer Base Cluster or in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC screen indicating Low Tire for EVIC enabled clusters 26 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of it an onboard diagnostic OBDII system which monitors the emissions and engine control sys tem If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on as a bulb check until the engine is started If the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds then blink for 5 seconds and remain on until the vehicle is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the condition investigated promptly If this light comes on and remains on while driving it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need for system service UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2
160. SION av G4 Ho ee hee eo EO E a e d gx 534 W Fuses nass ew N EIE KEN N 539 O Totally Integrated Power Module 539 502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M W Vehicle Storage 2242522554 REEN ERA RE 544 Mi Replacement Bulbs 545 B Bulb Replacement 44 545 D Dual Or Quad Headlamp Front Park And Turn Signal If Equipped 545 Hi ou LAMPS 4 6 6 one vie an dod DS ER eS HARARE 548 o Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Eu CET 9 048 H Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL With Cargo Lamy a eus oe come n e eds 550 o Cab Top Clearance Lamps If Equipped 551 o Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Dual Rear Wheels If Equipped 095 O Side Marker Lamps Dual Rear Wheels If BQUIDDEC E 554 Nee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503 W Fluid Capacities so REX Re RES 555 BYE it ui Lose RE IE EE EE OT 557 N Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 557 EMONASSIS oo wesens EURO RE eae DU 558 504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 7L r1005702 1 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick If Equipped 8 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Battery 11 Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 Integrated Power Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4 7L OD
161. STANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of
162. START 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK if equipped with an automatic transmission Turn the Key Fob to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob NOTE then pull the key out with your other hand 020207436 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinder with either side up For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 min utes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended chil
163. Service Park Assist System Park Assist System Blinded Trailer Brake Disconnected If Equipped Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park Remote start aborted Door ajar Remote start aborted Hood ajar Remote start aborted Fuel low Remote start disabled System fault Remote start disabled Turn key Remote start active Key to Run Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle to Reset Remote Start Active Insert Key and Turn to RUN Memory 1 Profile Set Memory 2 Profile Set Memory System Unavailable Not in Park Memory System Unavailable Seatbelt Buckled Memory 1 Profile Recall Memory 2 Profile Recall Adjustable Pedals Unavailable Vehicle in Reverse UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 e Adjustable Pedals Unavailable Cruise Engaged e To Tow Vehicle Safely Read Neutral Shift Procedure in Owners Manual EVIC Warning Lights e Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or more door may be ajar e Oil Pressure Warning Light qe This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engin
164. T SENSORS message to be displayed in the instrument cluster N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 WARNING e Drivers must be careful when backing up even CAUTION e The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the Park Sense sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system to be able to stop in time when the obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist sys tem Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedes trians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued EED REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF e Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear system it is strongly recommended that the ball Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen mount and h
165. T button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high lighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Hill Start Assist HSA When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating informa tion To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the sy
166. T PANEL 201 CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized deal WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph ership for service 5 Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour and or kilometers per hour mph km h 6 4 LOW This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four wheel drive LOW mode The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to gether forcing the front and rear wheels to 4 LOW 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M rotate at the same speed Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels For further information on four wheel drive operation and proper use refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped in Starting And Operating 7 Electronic Throttle Contr
167. T PANEL MEd If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Rando
168. This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours or driven less than one mile after a three hour period Refer to Tires General Informa tion in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS warning lamp to be turned off The system will automatically update and the TPMS warning lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures 420 STARTING AND OPERATING ee have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this info
169. Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is turned on pressing the GAIN adjustment button or sliding the manual brake control lever will display the GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light will not be displayed If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated Trailer Brake Module ITBM the Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light will flash ee STARTING AND OPERATING 453 GAIN Adjustment Buttons Pressing these buttons will adjust the brake control power output to the trailer brakes in 0 5 increments The GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased to a minimum of 0 no trailer braking GAIN The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control for the specific towing condition and should be changed as towing conditions change Changes to towing condi tions include trailer load vehicle load road conditions and weather Adjusting GAIN NOTE This should only be performed in a traffic free environment at speeds of approximately 20 25 mph 30 40 km h 1 Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition functioning normally and properly adjusted See your trailer dealer if necessary 2 Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connec tions according to the trailer manufacturer s instructions 3 When a trailer with
170. Trailer Towing Mirrors If Equipped NOTE Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror entering an automated car wash head to provide a greater vision range when towing extra wide loads To change position inboard or out board the mirror head should be rotated flipped in or out 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror and can be adjusted separately Blindspot Mirror Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a hands free system that allows you to use voice commands to dial a phone number stored in your cellular phone Press the Uconnect Phone button on the radio or steering wheel controls if equipped and follow the instructions to pair the cellular phone Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command can be initiated by pressing the VR button EvR located on the radio or steering wheel controls if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect Phone User Manual located on the DVD for further details N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or
171. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The driver s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror The mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Illuminated Vanity Mirror If Equipped Slide On Rod Features of Sun Visor If Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor Equipped To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing The sun visor Slide On Rod feature allows for addi the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on auto tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the matically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light sun To use the Slide On Rod feature rotate the sun visor downward and unclip it Pull the sun visor along the Slide On Rod until the sun visor is in the desired position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Slide On Rod Extender Trailer Towing Position
172. V 100 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 523 557 Sentry Key Immobilizer sis sen n bard beau 15 Sentry Key Programming less 17 Sentry Key Replacement iis eis 99 eer eens 17 Service Assistance l eee ee eens 581 Service Contract 604 INDEX NEE id Service Manuals SS EE SS Es SS eee 585 Setting the Clock 4 44 OR RE dics dud 230 241 244 253 Seines Personal xs gas ARE HS ED E HS 233 LES C nee ba Dae N aoe HD 300 Automatic Transmission esaa ea 303 308 Transfer Case sere me RERO CROs Ew AES 319 Transfer Case Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 020000 463 466 Transfer Case Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 000008 465 468 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 47 Shoulder Belts ss 4 04482545 EER RARR OER MEAG 38 Biol TUE ooo ae ORE ERA eae ee Be 84 118 200 Sliding Rear Window FOWEE ii aas MR SE MP RE OD RO RD ss 169 Snow Chains Tire Chains EE SS SS Se 414 SHOW PIOW us Ge ae DES AD RR eee eee ee ee 458 PMOVE TeS fae oh oo 4a eS RS oO REESE 416 pare DH sis bee ene Fae ORE da tor gs 409 Pak Pies cae eases fee Ge oe Gn eee et PES 597 Speed Control Cruise Control 125 DPCGIOMICIC wot Leu sce d Meee eee eer eq pe 201 rion P a 25 297 Automatic Transmission 6 0 seis tac seeds 297 Eppine Fails laid auae dana dore xORSUES 298 Sr P os 6 Game epee ee WS ea 25
173. Vanity Lamp Blue Light SCM Sw Bank 10 Amp IOD HVAC U Hood 20 Amp Htd Seat Htd Str Red Lamp 20 Amp Ign R Rear Seat Steer Red Yellow 10 Amp IGN R S ORC OCM Red 10 Amp IGN R ORC Trail Red Tow BUX Sense 20 Amp IGN R Trail Tow Yellow BUX 20 Amp IOD CCN Interior Yellow Mods 30 Amp IOD Amp Radio Green M47 10 Amp IGN R H Lamp 25 Amp Rear Wiper Red Wash HVAC Park Natural Assist Ir Sns 10 Amp Horn 1 Red MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543 CAUTION e When installing the totally integrated power mod Mini Fuse 20 Amp Cavity Cartridge Description Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 25 Amp Natural 20 Amp Yellow Fuse 15 Amp Blue M54 20 Amp Yellow mu i Outlet 2 Outlet 3 IGN R S SWAY TCASE DTCM FAD TRLR BRAKE MOD IGN R S MFSW CNN SCM TPM RR View IOD Spare ule cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the totally integrated power module and possibly result in a electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected 544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ee VEHICLE STORAGE If you are storing yo
174. ach time the lever is tapped upward speed increases so tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 5 km h etc To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the SET DECEL lever If the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position the set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is released Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever SET DECEL downward once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped downward speed decreases 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Accelerate for Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal Your vehicle may experience a downshift automatic transmissions only while climbing uphill or descending downhill This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be
175. act with hot engine or exhaust components causing a fire that may result in personal injury For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this warn ing light will display in the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 31 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se unbuckled the seat belt reminder light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 32 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Proc
176. ads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the car in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 355 Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
177. ae BERDE ee n 299 And MP3 Audio Play sie s sor 930 94 d Hone d 246 ll Media Center 730N 430 RER REN RBZ O Notes On Playing MP3 Files 249 AM FM Stereo Radio And CD DVD HDD o NAV If Equipped 0 ss eeeeees 239 O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 251 ll Media Center 130 RES RSC AM FM O Operating Instructions Voice Command Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack ea E dd And omis Radio quse me EER us HEER e i 252 D Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone Kf Equipped cesses e e ena 239 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 252 D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD oO Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio 299 And MP3 Audio Play 258 O Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio oaaao esee Oe ET ai ll Media Center 130 RES AM FM Stereo O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 263 Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack 243 O Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 263 D Operating Instructions Radio Mode 243 D Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone di EOUIDDOO sae s sain EG PRI Re e 264 NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 Bl Universal Consumer Interface UCI 0 5 If EQUIDPCC spies HE P O Connecting The iPod D Using This Feature O Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons o Play Mode O List Or Browse Mode ll Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped REN RER RBZ R
178. ailer or other property WARNING Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking There may be a increase in stop ping distance or trailer instability which could result in personal injury NS TA TING AND OPERATING 455 NOTE e An aftermarket controller may be available for use with trailers with air or electric over hydraulic trailer brake systems To determine the type of brakes on your trailer and the availability of controllers check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer e Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may cause damage to the electrical system and electronic modules of the vehicle See your authorized dealer if an aftermarket module is to be installed Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package will include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle s wiring harness 456 STARTING AND OPERATING The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector 26 Refer to the following illustrations D Co 057003765 o Seven Pin Connector 1 Battery 5 Ground 057003766 2 Ba
179. aising the wheel off the ground make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required NOTE If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial thumbwheel by hand it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack 4 By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface WARNINCG Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle unstable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off On single rear wheel SRW trucks install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel nuts toward the wheel On 3500 dual rear wheel models DRW the wheel nuts are a two piece assembly with a flat face Lightly tighten the wheel nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle has been lowered 6 Using the wheel wrench finish tightening the wheel nuts using a crisscross pattern The correct wheel nut tightness is 130 ft Ibs 177 N m torque 1500 Series 135 ft Ibs 183 N m torque for 2500 3500 single rear wheel SRW models and 145 ft lbs 197 N m for 3500 dual rear wheel models If in doubt about the correct tight ness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized deale
180. am the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than ten seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Flash Lamps with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or
181. amBox lid will open upward to nate when the lid is opened In addition to the automatic allow hand access Lift the lid to fully open illumination switch there is a manual on off switch located at the rear of each storage bin Pushing the switch once will turn off the bin lights pushing the switch again will turn the lights back on ka 036705542 RamBox Pushbutton and Lock 036706594 RamBox Light Switch N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 CAUTION Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time could cause the vehicle battery to discharge If the lid CAUTION Continued e Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be minimized to prevent damage to the lid and latching hinging mechanisms is required to stay open for extended periods of time Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to it is recommended that the bin lights be turned off manually using the on off switch heavy sharp objects placed in bin that shift due to vehicle motion In order to minimize potential for The RamBox storage bins can be locked using the damage idc all cargo to prevent movement and vehicle key To lock the storage bin insert the key into the protect inside surfaces of bin from heavy sharp keyhole on the pushbutton and turn clockwise to lock objects with appropriate padding CAUTION Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs to allow water to drain from bins To remove plug pull up on the
182. ance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY ist ES 583 O Gervice COnITACI 42604454 asa e REDS 583 W Warranty Information 584 M MOPAR Parts sos xd eme ERE 584 Bl Reporting Safety Defects 584 O In The 50 United States And Washington p oPPP m 584 O In Canada 580 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee W Publication Order Forms 585 O Traction Grades was xp emi e tuns TT RYS 587 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Temperate Grades sr ocior PR ew ee ee S 588 Quality Grades sy Shes a bee ORE WE he 586 O Tread weal 2 ses AO SERE SE EERS N HAS 587 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 5681 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor
183. and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 497 WARNING WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener e Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury even failure of the axle and tires A tire could or death e Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps and chains may break causing serious injuty explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed CAUTION EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for hooks tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle 498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Proper towing or lifting equip
184. and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and ra with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid 380 STARTING AND OPERATING If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To release the parking brake pull the parking brake release handle NOTE The Brake Warning Light will come on and flash to indicate that the parking brake is applied You must be sure that the parking brake is f
185. and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 582 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office
186. and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage 516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ee Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and can explode injuring you Other time unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressu
187. annels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited
188. ant that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 443 Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance
189. any of the buttons described below will bring up List mode List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticed During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards counter clockwise to get to the track faster In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 e Preset 5 Audiobooks e MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is e Preset 6 Podcasts en shortcut button to the genre listing on your e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on CAUTION the second line e Leaving the iPod or any suppo
190. arbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required 520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain e The catalytic converter requires the use of un carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and
191. arranty If the vehicle will be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km the vehicle must be towed with the rear wheels OFF the ground It may be towed on a flatbed or with the rear wheels raised or on a dolly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS la Engine Compartment 3 7L ssec es 504 W Maintenance Procedures 510 N Engine Compartment 4 7L 505 EES ne Ol Pr 511 N Engine Compartment 5 7L 506 siese Ik oi ae ee ee ee EN 513 lll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II 507 O Engine Air Cleaner Filter 2 ose e s 514 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 507 E Maintenance Free Battery swerm sk ER Mi Emissions Inspection And Maintenance D Air Conditioner Maintenance HORT AM Ss sans haves he nese ean es ce ees 508 O Front Driveshaft Lubrication 2500 3500 B Replacement Parts 0 509 Four Wheel Drive Models Ram Trucks EM Dealer Service sae ER ED ERA ees 509 OMY sce is to sh n oet e onis 517 O Body Lubrication x23 933x945 1 939 teWars 517 EL Windshield Wiper Blades vg uc sc ws 518 o Adding Washer Fluid se 518 LUEXDANSE DV Ste partiras paete Sod exo 519 COONS sel is e pop a 556 rosita 022 E Drake GYSEN uo eas FREE IDE ES ERA 527 O Rear Axle And 4X4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level ETETE 529 A leser B rr P 530 O Automatic Transmission 531 D Appearance Care And Protection From COMO
192. ars Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or in partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers e Front seat belt pretensioners if equipped e Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC if equipped e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants e All seat belt systems except driver s and second row center position include Automatic Locking Retractors ALR if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Please pay clos
193. as shown in both the Tire Loading Information Label and the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information Label It is also equipped to be driven with tire pressures appro priate to either a Light Load condition or the vehicle Max Load condition 055807401 Tire Light Load Inflation Switch 426 STARTING AND OPERATING xe e The tire light load inflation switch will allow the driver to change between the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold and the light load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold depending on the vehicle s load condition Refer to the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label for the vehicle s Light Load inflation pressures and Tire and Loading Information label for the vehicle s Max Load inflation pressures 4 SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION LIGHT LOAD DEFINITION 2 DOCUPANTS 160 LEE EACH PLUS POD LES CARGO MAX LOAD DEFINITION AA DEFINED OM OAIVERS SIOE B PILLAA PLACARD FRONT HEAR LIGHT LOAD INFLATION PRESSURE COLO MAX LOAD INFLATION PRESSURE COLD TIRE SIZE ME SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION mE B60268494 81c57c10 Example Supplemental Tire Pressure Label To switch from the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold to the light load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold begin by placing the ignition switch in the RUN position Next lower
194. ase 4 Upper Switch Bank 10 Cup Holders 16 Parking Brake Release 5 Upper Glove Compartment 11 Climate Controls 6 Lower Glove Compartment 12 Power Outlet Cigar Lighter 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SWITCH BANK BUTTON DESCRIPTION Upper Switch Bank The upper switch bank is located on the center of the instrument panel oo ae EE p NIE b e HAUL OFF o 1 TOWIHAUL Refer to Starting And Operating for more information 2 ESP OFF Refer to Starting And Operating for more information 3 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER Refer to What To Do In Emergencies for more infor mation 4 115V POWER INVERTER Refer to Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for more information 5 REAR PARK ASSIST Refer to Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for more information 6 TPMS LIGHT LOAD IF EQUIPPED Refer to Starting And Operating for more information Lower Switch Bank The lower switch bank is located on the center of the instrument panel NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 2 VENTILATED SEATS Refer to Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for more information 3 HEATED STEERING WHEEL Refer to Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for more information F 040106559 1 HEATED SEATS Refer to Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for more information 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT
195. ate the vehicle NOTE A Key Fob that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry
196. ation 00 148 gc ee HE Ed DEd oca ead ine dee RA DES HO SR 155 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 W Power Inverter If Equipped 156 eel RES EES di ak huai 158 D Front Instrument Panel Cupholders 40 20 40 Seats EE EE EE EE EE Ee 158 D Front Instrument Panel Cupholders Floor Mounted SUEN ur uid oce ose oe ome Pura HE 159 O Rear Cupholder Quad Cab 199 B Rear Cupholder Crew Cab 160 oie EE EER AE EA RE EN EE EE 160 HElove box SIOE agua eee fe oes SY a E 160 EVNDOGPSIChdce gea dedita SIR meg a 162 O Center Storage Compartment IE EQUIDDCG ca xeuw uua Sou aye ae Y SE Di 163 O Second Row In Floor Storage Bin If Equipped O Seatback Storage O Storage Regular Cab O Storage And Seats Crew Cab O Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers Regular Cab Models TT 168 W Rear Window Features 168 CO Rear Window Defroster 168 H Power Sliding Rear Window IP EOUIDDBH 42544444 x HEESE S ROB SE 169 o Manual Sliding Rear Window IE So UNDO 32 49 9 e544 ORE DOE Boies E 170 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ll Fold Flat Load Floor If Equipped 170 W Slide In Campers iss EER o ER PEOR os 186 Milo lU Equipped ss 02 beeen 54 172 EG Der PG USE a sap port IHE X e eo ern 2 186 o Rambox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins 172 W Easy Off Tailgate 0 0 186 o Rambox Saf
197. ator lights will do the following If All Shift Conditions Are Met 1 The current position indicator light will turn OFF 2 The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift 322 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 3 When the shift is complete the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met 1 The indicator light for the current position will remain ON 2 The newly selected position indicator light will con tinue to flash 3 The transfer case will not shift NOTE Before retrying a selection make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five seconds and retry selection To find the shift require ments refer to the Shifting Procedure for your transfer case located in this section The SVC 4WD Warning Light monitors the electronic shift four wheel drive system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not function ing properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SVC 4WD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal inju
198. ature press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Using the Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch t
199. authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 562 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M Once a Month CAUTION e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required Required Maintenance Intervals e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake NOTE Vehicles built with the 4 7L engine are master cylinder and transmission and add as needed equipped with sixteen spark plugs One set is located on the t
200. ay the media For playing an iPod use the separate 16 pin connector port in the glove compartment on some vehicles e Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s 16 pin connector port which is located in the glove compartment on some vehicles Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s UCI system iPod may take a few seconds to connect the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE e It may be necessary to remove the connector pin protection cap from the 16 pin connector port prior to connecting the cable e f the iPod battery is completely discharged it may not communicate with the UCI system until a mini mum charge is attained Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI 16 pin connector port e The iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The iPod battery char
201. b Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCR
202. bee SS 67 72 Cipar Ligier Mm 155 Cleaning Whe 26 034 SMEER apogee ahs Rees eens 536 Cate Gone cau pi ries a LAE ORR R 278 God E E E 239 241 244 253 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 277 Weie C resa DAE HER cee eee one ee ees 230 Compass CalbrabllOl aes xr ars teg ERES T 231 Compass Varig6B s sux acr sadsad Rad Oe 232 Computer Tip Tavel REY DR REK tae s 227 Connector OC oto eeatena HY eee Chee eee OR Re 265 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 265 Conserving boel e pe Hd 226 227 Console Overhead 000000 140 Contract Service eee 583 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 524 COOIMGSVStEM oes be REK DERS PSP S EE 022 Adding Coolant Antifreeze sn 523 Coolant Capdelly 2 545455 obe ET HR RNENSE 555 Ne INDEX 593 Coolant Level 44444546444 SEL AA EXIT 522 525 Disposal of Used Coolant a6 imet p25 Drain Flush and Refill 22 2 xs 522 lise seri D AS 025 Points to Remember lun 526 Pressure Cap acu sores EES EE OE OE inira 524 PaO d 22446664 OU EE phen ees HE 524 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 523 555 557 Cruise Control Speed Control 125 CUPNOIGEIS oa san p He ound a Ree enw es ages 158 Customer Assistance sn 581 Daytime Running Lights 118 Dealer Service aud esed d RAAD EER ER ds 509 Defroster Rear Window 168 Defroster Windshield 82
203. ble however see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi see tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e SERV 4WD The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift SERV 4WD system If the SERV 4WD light stays on or 4WD omes on during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required e Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil ity Program ESP
204. cellent on and off road capabilities These off road capabilities will allow you to explore those wilderness trails where few travel providing a source of exciting and satisfying recreation Before you venture out you should contact your local governmental agency to determine the designated off road vehicle 336 STARTING AND OPERATING M ORV trails or recreation areas You should always tread lightly and only use established roads trails or ORV recreational areas The National Forest Service Bureau of Land Management or local Department of Natural Re sources are a wealth of information and usually have maps with marked trails Skid Plates And Underbody Protection Steel skid plates protect the major driveline components of the truck including the fuel tank transfer case and steering damper In addition this vehicle is equipped with boxed cross members and fore aft rails This addi tional protection allows the vehicle to be utilized in severe off road situations that would be considered im passable by a normal truck Ramp Travel Index RTT The ramp travel index is the distance in inches that you can drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20 degree ramp without lifting any other wheel off the ground This distance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of the vehicle and multiplied by 1 000 is the RII This vehicle has an RTI of 655 which means you can articulate one front wheel 32 inches in the air while the other three whe
205. ch automatically disengages NOTE e The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant antifreeze are warm usually after 1 to 3 miles 1 6 to 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the 316 STARTING AND OPERATING ee torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Pressing the TOW HAUL switch when the transmission is sufficiently warm will dem onstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive e If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque con verter will refill within five seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear position FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF EQUIPPED Four wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a manually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted transfer case Refer to the operating instructions for your transfer case located in this section for further informa tion Manually Shifted Transfer Case If Equipped The transfer case provides four mode positions e Two wheel drive high range 2H e Four wheel drive high range 4H e Neut
206. ch other as this 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the could establish a ground connection and personal positive post of the discharged vehicle injury could result 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper Jump Starting Procedure cable to the positive post of the booster battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 495 WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery
207. chments in the center position of a Quad Cab Mega Cab or Crew Cab model rear seat The LATCH anchorages in this seat are designed for the two outboard seating positions only A child may be placed in the rear center seating position of a Quad Cab Mega Cab or Crew Cab model using the seat belt and child tether anchorage Failure to follow this may result in serious or fatal injury NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether anchorages Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
208. ck Engine 600 INDEX NEE Id Manual Service ssi 644 6454o454 ee EE 0455 585 Manual Transmission Fluid Level Check 20 sa 000 Ee 200 531 Lubricant Selection eese 558 Memory oc P tt 106 Mini Hip Computer seere 656 4454 pn rae 227 hr TR NE Uae A oe ee ee eS we ELT 91 Automatic DIMMING iis si dene anda n a 92 Electric Powered leen 94 Heated us mace ke DS EO RS dd HALE oed ER d 95 jn oe eh bbc Gee he ee oe oe A 106 Gi e oi So ER bee a ye hee oe eh ee 92 Rearview 0 0 0 ce ee ee eee 91 TAN TOWING sickens RE OR ARE ER ARE 97 Mode F l Saver soes 66 4 t5 SS DRR de 226 227 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System i s oen RERRRES 419 Mopar wis P EERS SERE 509 584 Multi Function Control Lever uso doce os 118 Navigation System Uuconnect gps 138 New Vehicle Break In Period 79 Occupant Restraints sca ee PR kx Ses 37 58 61 Occupant Restraints Sedan 55 58 60 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 428 Solon MP m ARE RE 204 joo ICT TERT 204 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 335 357 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 335 397 eike id lle ie EE AA sae bee oy 206 225 Oil Change Indicator Reset 206 225 IM Ai AE EE vos des eg eirca dete ges oA 511 557 EED 222254 cHM SR SU POE TE PERS 990 Chose Merval ius sese dee bw S ROES EXE DII Die o 6525464 SKAG AAK ie Ma e d ea
209. ckup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn Four Pin Connector 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps Female Pins 4 Park a Pak 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn ee STARTING AND OPERATING 457 WARNING Any work done to the vehicle s electrical system or wiring should be performed by a qualified automo tive technician If done improperly it may cause damage to the electrical system wiring and could result in serious or fatal injury Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range select TOW HAUL mode if equipped or select a lower gear using the Electronic Range Select ERS feature NOTE Using TOW HAUL mode or a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend trans mission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you regularly tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to Mainte nance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Tow Haul To reduce potent
210. class S chains is permitted with P245 70R17 tires only The use of class U chains is permitted on the front and rear of 4X4 2500 model trucks with LI245 7OR17E tires The use of class U chains is permitted on the front and rear of 4X4 3500 model trucks with Dual Rear Wheels and LT235 80R17E tires On 4X2 2500 3500 model trucks class U snow chains are permitted on the rear wheels only of vehicles equipped with LT245 70R17 LT265 70R17 and LT235 80R17 size tires On 4x4 2500 3500 SRW Single Rear Wheel model trucks class U snow chains are permitted on the rear wheels only of vehicles equipped with LT265 70R17E 416 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION Do not use tire chains on 4x4 model trucks equipped with P265 70R17 LT275 70R17 P275 60R20 tires There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle Do not use tire chains on the 4X2 front wheels of 2500 3500 SRW Single Rear Wheels equipped with LT245 70R17 LT265 70R17 LT235 80R17 tires or 4X4 front wheels equipped with LT265 70R17E There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle SNOW TIRES Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc tion as the front tires Consult the manufacturer of the snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed requirement associated with the tire These tires should al
211. cle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition Refer to Supple mental Tire Pressure Information in Starting and Op erating for further information The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 408 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall
212. concen tration of coolant is used Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air with the blower setting in high This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging and Frosting Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in mild rainy and or humid weather Windows may frost on the inside of the glass in very cold weather To clear the windows select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed Do not use the Recirculation mode without A C for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow can cause odor and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Tips WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS Mab Set the mode contro
213. connector holding the housing and wir ing harness to the body N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551 Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result e Outside Bulbs Cargo Lamps e Inside Bulb Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 5 Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and housing Cab Top Clearance Lamps If Equipped 1 Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp 552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Rotate the socket 1 4 turn and pull it from the lamp assembly 80ecdc9b 3 Pull the bulb straight from it s socket and replace N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553 Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Dual Rear Wheels If 2 Turn the socket V turn counterclockwise to access the Equipped bulb 1 Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access 3 Pull the bulb straight out from the socket to the bulb sockets 4 Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and housing 554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Side Marker Lamps Dual Rear Wheels If 1 Push rearward on the side marker lamp assembly Equipped 2 Pull the entire assembly from the fender 3 Turn the socket V turn counterclockwise and remove from assembly to access the bulb 4 Pull the bulb straight out from socket 5 Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and housing N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555 FLUI
214. correct the situation LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL The limited slip differential provides additional traction on snow ice mud sand and gravel particularly when there is a difference between the traction characteristics of the surface under the right and left rear wheels During normal driving and cornering the limited slip unit per forms similarly to a conventional differential On slip pery surfaces however the differential delivers more of the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better traction The limited slip differential is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions With both rear wheels on a slippery surface a slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction When starting with only one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface slight momentary application of the parking brake may be necessary to gain maximum traction 354 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING On vehicles equipped with a limited slip differential never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear Wheel remaining on the ground You could lose control of the vehicle Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when both rear wheels are on a slippery surface This could cause both rear wheels to spin and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES When driving on wet or slushy ro
215. cupant Restraints is EE ee 37 O Lap Shoulder Belts su ss ds 2444240585 38 D Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 47 HE enter Lap Dells x 22s eg doe ve OR ke Ge 47 D Automatic Locking Retractor ALR Mode IL CQUID PCG one sie Oe OG a f rese RE 48 O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 49 O Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped 49 D Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert T 50 O Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 51 N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 O Seat Belt Extender less O Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS ie Dr Pm O Airbag System Components O Advanced Front Airbag Features O Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls D Event Data Recorder EDR D Child Restraints 58 51 W Engine Break In Recommendations 79 Eie Mr 80 O Transporting Passengers sucked a 80 I ELEXDOUSP8 ting pu Vues y a bas ERE S 81 O Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Velde san EESE ese 4 oes ore RAAD 82 H Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle iussa EER RES Gano RE 84 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN
216. d A H5elfsLimititig Control a sedo reta H Driver Easy Exit And Easy Entry Control 103 101 M To Open And Close The Hood 110 jo MI lis oie ese ete eas ew E POI C9 pe ss 112 Hi iesdloliS ac oos cs WREDE EE eg besa RO os 113 H Automatic Headlights If Equipped 113 O Headlight Delay sass a dare rb doe 114 O Parking Lights And Panel Lights 114 oO Fog Lights If Equipped 114 DINEO DIES eretedseuw aes be E TEES 115 ECan coset 2s aeg tees eae eta de di 117 D Lights On Reminder una e sore oe eto 117 O Pattery OVER 4 iocus many EA ULIS PARE 117 B Daytime Running Lights DRL Canada Only And Fleet Vehicles asc nur VR 118 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 O Multifunction Lever ss es WROEG RS ES 118 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 120 EL Windshield Wipers uses c8 ese HHA Rs 120 o Windshield Washers 121 AME PaE css scs Ag EA HEES AND 121 IN Tilt Steering Column ssa SA ne eee 121 ll Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped 122 W Driver Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 124 GACEN sa srra temeri Bee REO IER CR 124 ll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 125 El LO en c Rr a HER ae wee ek 126 O To Set a Desired Speed oe voee vince ara v 126 H Deactivating Electronic Speed Control 126 El io Resume Speed 2556545 ied HORE RES 127 O Vatyine The Speed Seng ss ae See demere 127 B To Accelerate For Passing
217. d ends of Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding cables straps and snatch blocks The shackle s pin is f 20 proper winch usage may result in severe injury threaded to allow easy re 8149d0e6 8149d0fd moval Tree Trunk Protector Typi cally made of tough high quality nylon it provides the operator an attachment point for the winch rope to a wide variety of anchor points and objects as well as protect liv ing trees Always use supplied hook strap to hold the hook when spooling wire rope in or out Never use as a hoist Never use to move persons Never exceed winch or wire rope rated capacity Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling the wire rope Never touch wire rope or hook while in tension or under load Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is under load wire rope is in tension or wire rope drum is moving Continued 364 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Always disconnect the remote control when not in use Never winch when there are less than five wraps of wire rope around the winch drum e Always stand clear of wire rope and load and keep others away during winching Always keep hands and clothing clear of the wire rope hook and fairlead opening during operation and when spooling Never wrap wire rope back onto itself Always use a choker chain wire choker rope or tree trunk Always pass remote control through a wi
218. d on the switch and the seatback will move in either direction Head Restraints Eight Way Power Seats If Equipped The power seat controls are on the outboard side of the front seat cushions The power seat switch can be moved forward and backward as well as up and down to control 030905752 Power Seat Switches 1 Power Seat Switch 2 Power Seatback Switch N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 CAUTION Do not put anything under a power seat It may cause damage to the seat or the seat controls Power Lumbar If Equipped The lumbar controls are located on the outboard side of the seat cushion The lumbar support can be increased by pressing the front of the switch and decreased by press ing the back of the switch Lumbar Control Switch Heated Seats If Equipped Both front seats and rear passenger seats can be equipped with heaters The switches for the front seats are located in the instrument panel under the climate controls The switches for the rear passenger seats are located on the back of the center console 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off Press the switch once to select High level heating Press the switch a sec o
219. d the an chor point Do this before the wire rope is put under ten sion Do not approach or move the blanket once tension is applied Do not allow it to get pulled into the fairlead If it is necessary to move or remove the blanket slack the tension on the wire rope first 8149d108 14 Establish no people zones Make your intentions clear Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinity surrounding the winching operation is completely aware of your intentions before you pull Declare where the spectators should not stand never behind or in front of the vehicle and never near the wire rope or snatch block Your situation may have other no people zones 814a0ddc No People Zones 15 Begin winching With the winching vehicles engine on and light tension already on the wire rope begin winching slowly and steadily Be sure that the wire rope is winding evenly and tightly around the spooling drum ee STARTING AND OPERATING 373 For additional assistance the winched vehicle can be NOTE slowly driven while being pulled by the winch Continue e Avoid overheating the winch motor For extended pulling until the vehicle is on stable ground If you are winching stop at reasonable intervals to allow the able to drive the vehicle the winching operation is winch motor to cool down complete e What to look for under load The wire rope must always spool onto the drum as indicated by the drum rotation decal on the winch As
220. d to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPARS parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for 510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assess
221. day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se MEDIA CENTER 130 RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate TUNE SCROLL O 042305233 Media Center 130 RES RSC Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice
222. de of the bin by pulling on the glow in the dark lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism Bed Extender If Equipped The bed extender has three functional positions e Storage Position e Divider Position e Extender Position Storage Position The storage position for the bed extender is at the front of the truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area when not in use To install the bed extender into the storage position perform the following 1 Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to release the extender side gates 036706565 Center Handle and Lock 1 Center Handle Lock 2 Handle 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 With the side gates open position the extender fully 3 Rotate the side gates closed allowing the outboard forward in the bed against the front panel ends to be _ in front of the cargo tie down loops PF N Storage Position Cargo Tie Down Loop A 036706567 y 4 Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side gates in the closed position 036706568 Side Gates Closed 5 Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to secure the panel into place and assist against theft UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Divider Position The divider position is intended for managing your cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the bed Ther
223. ding Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the 586 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and
224. ditional traction Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck As a good practice before entering any mud hole get out and determine how deep it is if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck in a trail maintain your vehicle s momentum and do not stop The key to driving in soft sand using the appropriate tire pressure accelerating slowly avoid ing abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle s momentum If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi 103 kPa to allow for a greater tire surface area Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces Be sure you have a way to air the tires back up prior to reducing the pressure 340 STARTING AND OPERATING xe CAUTION Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu vers Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Points While driving off road you will encounter many types of terrain These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles Be
225. dren in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In lgnition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob NOTE e The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position e f equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC the EVIC will display Key In Ignition SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee The system uses a Key Fob with a factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and oper
226. e 2 New Tire 412 STARTING AND OPERATING xe WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability NS TA TING AND OPERATING 413 WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudde
227. e CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works
228. e In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for their older products Regular Cab models have two tether anchorages one each behind the front center and right seats Quad Cab Mega Cab and Crew Cab models have three anchor ages one behind each of the rear seats WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to seat failure and injury to the child In a collision the seat could come loose and allow the child to crash into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers or even be thrown from the vehicle Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Follow the instruc tions below See your authorized dealer for help if necessary N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Tether Anchorage Points at the Right and Center Front Seat Regular Cab All Seats 1 Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat 2 Lift the cover if so equipped and attach the hook to the square opening in the sheet metal 3 Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions BE 022632838 Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting 1 Tether Strap Hook 2 Tether Strap to Child Restraint 3 Tether Anchor 76
229. e Refer to Overdrive Operation Use this range for most city and highway driving Overdrive Operation The Overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec tronically controlled fourth and fifth gear Overdrive The transmission will automatically shift from DRIVE to Overdrive if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in DRIVE 314 STARTING AND OPERATING ee e the engine coolant antifreeze has reached normal operating temperature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated e transmission has reached normal temperature operating NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down After cool down the transmis sion will resume normal operation The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully pres
230. e Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched before edge To install push plug downward into drain hole moving or driving vehicle NOTE Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo dividers and shelf supports These accessories in addi tion to other RamBox accessories are available from MOPAR Continued 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE RamBox Safety Warning RamBox Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal Lever If Equipped injury or damage to your vehicle As a security measure a Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mecha WARNING nism Always close the storage bin covers when your vehicle is unattended Do not allow children to have access to the storage bins Once in the storage bin young children may not be able to escape If trapped in the storage bin children can die from suffocation or heat stroke In an accident serious injury could result if the storage bin covers are not properly latched Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 NOTE In the event of an individual being locked inside the storage bin the storage bin cover can be opened from insi
231. e ParkSense When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system is mal functioning the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate If CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC after mak ing sure the rear bumper is clean and free of snow ice mud or other debris see your authorized dealer Cleaning ParkSense Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage and Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system oper ating properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system e When you turn ParkSense off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST DISABLED Further more once you turn Par
232. e STARTING AND OPERATING 421 NOTE e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire the tire failure or condition Tire Pressure Monitor System Components e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim while adjusting your tire pressure mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve e Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the a vng 5 y stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Underin flation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life mee ra and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the ability tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain l th l e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte BP Eb aa nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists of the following components correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Four Wheel Sensors e Receiver Module e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp 422 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Tire Pressure
233. e are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels which allow for various positions to assist in managing your cargo 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To install the bed extender into a divider position per form the following 1 Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to release the extender side gates Center Handle and Lock 1 Center Handle Lock 2 Handle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 2 With the side gates open position the extender so the 4 Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side outboard ends align with the intended slots in the sides gates in the closed position of the bed 036706568 mm ada Side Gates Closed Aligning Gate To Slots 5 Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place 3 Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard ends and assist against theft are secured into the intended slots of the bed 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Extender Position The extender position allows you to load the bed of the truck beyond the tail gate The bed extender will add an additional 15 in 38 cm in the back of the truck when additional cargo room is needed The extender position utilizes a locating pin and rotating handle located on both sides of the truck bed near the tailgate a ll TTI al 036706569 Extender Position To instal
234. e attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions except the Quad Cab Mega Cab and Crew Cab front center seating position have combi nation lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 collision the belt w
235. e instrument cluster Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information ECO ECO ON Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO ON indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO ON 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M depending on driving habits and vehicle usage Press the Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings or the ECO display If the vehicle diagnostic system determines d that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator Loose Will display in the odometer display area Gascap Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press Indicator the TRIP button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Lo tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is improperly installed or damaged a noFUSE message will display in the odom eter display area
236. e jack and jack tools you must remove the plastic access cover located on the side of the seat To remove the cover pull the front part of the cover closest to the front of the seat toward you to release a locking tab Once the front of the cover is loose slide the cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the seat frame Jack Access Cover 474 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Remove the jack and tools by removing the wing bolt and sliding the assembly from under the seat 060507579 j Jack and Tools 2500 3500 Series 060505827 Jack and Tools 1500 Series N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 475 WARNING After using the jack and tools always reinstall them in the original carrier and location While driving you may experience abrupt stopping rapid accelera tion or sharp turns A loose jack tools bracket or other objects in the vehicle may move around with force resulting in serious injury Reinstalling The Jack And Tools 1500 Series 1 Lower the jack all the way down by turning the jack turn screw until the jack is snug 2 Position the jack and tool bag unrolled Make sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack turn screw Turn Screw and Lug 476 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 3 Fold the flap and roll the jack tool kit into a cylindrical package in direction of arrows and tie to the jack using the tie straps 81054ece Tying Bag to Jack with Straps
237. e oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Speed Control Light This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the YA Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be driva
238. e preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton t
239. e the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533 NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tem perature If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release parking brake To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully s
240. e to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator character extension and a three n nm e Level 2 31 including a separator character extension and a three Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Frequency kHz B
241. e when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your Satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 As NJ qo Xt De 2 4 a gO xz mm si ECYHDHIC BTA SR ITT ATEN iH FUEL NEAR lk KA FXTEDICR EAR fiis OE AA TURM inda t LIFE AE HEATED BEAT ADJUSTAES E FLECTRONIC PADICANH MAANI WET FAILUME FPFF CONTRE jer de m TIS iui x 3 z y Q2 N ZO oi Wa 072 o FEL REAR WIMDCHN WINDSHIELD MASTER LOATH CENE Hen ANG LOWER HEATED I HEAT DEW LET TERE PRESSURE DIE LL DELET wina PARING TSS APEN WEE Fence PEREN OUTLET MDAITIRA a Oe P wn FU T 4 OR OG X Hat Qa g a FUEL FILL SE REAR WAN PRCA A DOME LEEK FHOHTFOS LOW HBOODRELEAHE LOWER AR amp ECIHCUILATIOR TOHVEITELE TRAAG TIM ALL ent FAILURE OP A4THLOCK MATETE FLA LEVEL Pm eT A WIMDCHN DERI FORT HAA SYE
242. e winch Arrange the wire rope so it will not kink or tangle when spooled Be sure any wire rope already on the spooling drum is wound tightly and evenly layered Tighten and straighten the layer if necessary Keep the wire rope under light tension and spool the wire rope back and onto the winch drum in even layers Stop frequently to tighten and straighten the layers as necessary Repeat this process until the winch hook is the same distance as the full length of the remote control from the winch Pinch the hook between your thumb and forefinger and attach the hook strap Hold the hook strap between the thumb and forefinger to keep tension on the wire rope Walk the wire rope towards the fairlead carefully spooling in the remaining wire rope By pulsing the remote control switch 19 Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the tow hook STARTING AND OPERATING 375 20 Disconnect the remote control Disconnect the remote control cord from the control box and store in a clean and dry place Winching operations are now complete Put the cap on the solenoid plug in NOTE Always store the remote control in a protected clean dry area 376 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Rigging Techniques Various winching situations will require application of other winching techniques These could range from too little distance to achieve maximum pull using straight line rigging simply increasing pulling power or main taining a straight line pu
243. eached then press the SELECT button N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 3 Press the DOWN button until the Compass Variance message is displayed in the EVIC then press the SELECT button The last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the BACK button to exit Customer Programmable Features System Setup Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK If the transmission is out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving a warning message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE is fol lowed in three seconds by VEHICLE NOT IN PARK Press and release the UP or DOWN button until System Setup displays in the EVIC Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the following choices Select Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll through the language choices Press the SELECT button to select English Spanish Espafiol French Frangais Italian Italiano German Deutsch and Dutch Neder lands Then as you continue the information will dis play in the selected language Nav Turn By Turn When this feature is selected the navigation system utilizes voice commands gu
244. ead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying a passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Children too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it THIN
245. eat such as a blanket or cushion This c turn the ventilated seat OR When may cause the seat heater to overheat High speed is selected both lights on 030905581 the switch will be illuminated When Ventilated Seats If Equipped Low speed is selected one light will be Located in the seat cushion and seatback are small fans that draw the air from around the occupant and exhaust it underneath the seat and into the passenger compart NOTE ment The fans draw this air across the surface of the seat The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to using air ducts and fine perforations in the covering to operate help keep the driver cooler in higher ambient tempera tures illuminated e The drivers ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote The ventilated seat switches are located in the switch Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know bank in the center stack of the instrument panel just Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information below the climate controls The fans operate at two speeds High and Low 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 40 20 40 Front Bench Seat If Equipped The seat is divided into three segments The outboard seat portions are each 40 of the total width of the seat The back of the center portion 20 easily folds down to provide an armrest center storage compartment if equipped DRIVER MEMORY S
246. eated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Automatic Transmission Fluid and Filter Change Refer to Maintenance Schedule or further information NOTE If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter s should be changed It is important that proper lubricant is used in the transmission Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse affect on paint metal trim
247. eats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints e Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for Children e The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh ing more than 40 Ibs 18 Kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm WARNING e Improper installation can l
248. ed Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio To Manually Set the Clock 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this fea
249. ed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511 CAUTION Continued The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always components as the chemicals can damage your dipstick Adding one quart of oi
250. ed to power small electrical devices refer to Electrical Power Outlets for further information 035305808 pm _ d Lower Storage Bin 035305807 Upper Storage Compartment N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Second Row In Floor Storage Bin If Equipped To open in floor storage bin lift upward on the handle of In floor storage bins are located in front of the second the latch and open the lid row seats and can be used for extra storage The storage bins have removable liners that can be easily removed for cleaning NOTE The front seat may have to be moved forward to fully open the lid 1 Opened Storage Bin 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Seatback Storage Storage Regular Cab Located in the back of both the driver and passenger The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs front seats are pockets that can be used for storage the length of the cab 035205816 Drivers Side Seatback Storage Storage Bin UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Storage and Seats Crew Cab The Crew Cab models provide additional storage under CAUTION the rear seats Lift the seats to access the storage com Always lift the storage compartment lids by using partment the handle Failure to lift the lids by using the handle can result in damage to the lids To open the storage compartments lift upward on the handle of the latch and open the
251. edures in What To Do In Emergencies For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 33 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light If Equipped The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil ity Program ESP is combined with Brake Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible ESP BAS For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information WARNING If a warning light remains on the system may not be working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or BAS Under certain driving conditions where ESP or BAS would be beneficial you if you have not adjus
252. eeds 15 mph 24 km h Auto Lock Doors Programming The Auto Lock Doors feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings System Setup in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure 3 Place the Key Fob into the ignition 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the Key Fob from the OFF position to the ON position a minimum of four times ending in the OFF position Do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door LOCK switch 6 A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has been disabled N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 7 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps 8 If a chime is not heard program mode was canceled before the feature could be disabled If necessary repeat the above procedure Auto Unlock Doors If Equipped This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when either front door is opened This will occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been driven shifted out of PARK and all doors closed Auto Unlock Door
253. eled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window Rear Window Switch 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Manual Sliding Rear Window If Equipped Unfolding the Load Floor A locking device in the center of the window helps to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle Squeeze the lock to release the window 1 Lift the 60 40 seat cushion s to the upward position FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR IF EQUIPPED Quad Cab models with a 60 40 rear seat may be equipped with a folding load floor WARNING Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on the load floor While driving or in an accident you may experience abrupt stopping rapid acceleration or sharp turns Loose objects stored on the load floor may move around with force and strike occupants Unfolding The Load Floor resulting in serious or fatal injury Ce 036606528 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 2 Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until Positioning the Load Floor for Storage Access Under the load floor unfolds into position the Seat Em 1 Lift the 60 40 seat cushion s to the upward position 1 ES 2 Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the w load floor Um 3 Lift the load floor up to access st
254. els remain in contact with the ground Water Fording Characteristics Water fording characteristic is the vehicle s ability to cross a body of still water where the powertrain and drivetrain are safe from water ingestion This vehicle has high water fording characteristics with the ability to cross a pool of water without stopping 24 inches deep at a maximum speed of 10 mph 16 km h and a pool of water 30 inches deep at a maximum speed of 5 mph 8 km h both with an entrance ramp angle of 1 3 degrees ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 CAUTION The door sill height is 25 inches Water may intrude into the interior of the vehicle at greater depths Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation Many off road driving conditions require the simulta neous use of the brake and throttle two footed driving When climbing rocks logs or other stepped objects using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline The Basics Of Off Road Driving You will encounter many types of terrain driving off road You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding There are many types of surface conditions hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow and ice Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle s steering handling and traction Control ling your vehicle is one of the ke
255. emote headphones These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Integrated remote storage in screen location Three different medias can be played simultaneously R TM Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Cabin speakers and Headphone Channels 1 and 2 Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User e Easy menu driven functions on touch screen radios Manual located on the DVD for further details Video and audio input jacks available in rear seating area N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 e Nine different medias to choose from in each screen AM FM Sirius Radio DVD1 DVD2 Hard Disc Drive HDD AUX in radio AUX1 AUX2 The LCD screen is located in the overhead compartment console 8161d54e VES Remote Control Location NOTE Refer to the Uconnect Multimedia section of Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Overhead Video Screen 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045105562 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bo
256. ep hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent What is the surface traction Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow controlled descent Are there obstacles Is it a straight descent Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends too fast If you feel confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4L Low Range with the transmission in first gear manually select first gear on automatic transmissions and pro 344 STARTING AND OPERATING ee sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down ceed with caution Allow engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNINCG Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL Use WARNING Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury e If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine and transmission to vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured e Driving Across An
257. eplace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect exhaust system including isolators O O C C O L L L Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 569 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires L1 Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only L1 Inspect exhaust system including isolators Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road snow plowing or frequent trailer towing Inspect exhaust system including isolators Odometer Reading Date Repair
258. epth and the ability to safely cross Crossing Puddles Pools Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water Puddles pools flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth approach angle and bottom condition Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering This makes for a faster cleaner and easier vehicle recovery If you are able to determine you can safely cross than proceed using the low and slow method ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 CAUTION downstream out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle s body Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec Before you proceed determine the speed of the current tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator the water s depth approach angle bottom condition and if there are any obstacles then cross at an angle e Crossing Ditches Streams Shallow Rivers Or Other heading slightly upstream using the low and slow Flowing Water Flowing water can be extremely technique dangerous Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control Even in very shallow water a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and y
259. equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should re main free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in
260. er Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 565 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service 30 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the Rotate the tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 5 7L Engines Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet Lube the front drive shaft fitting off road snow plowing or frequent trailer towing 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for Inspect the transfer case fluid damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles Inspect exhaust system including isolators equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect exhaust system including isolators M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair O
261. erating for fur ther information Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Continued 448 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION Continued WARNING Continued e Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph and will not shift during travel When trailering 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts This helps the engine and other parts of the can occur that may be difficult for the driver to vehicle wear in at the heavier loads control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners WARNINCG Improper towing can lead to an in
262. erating in TOW HAUL mode the transmission will shift to third gear and fourth gear will be enabled under steady cruise conditions 051205601 TOW HAUL Switch The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started 308 STARTING AND OPERATING M Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi tions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the Transmission Limp Home Mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will operate when in DRIVE in second gear only To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the PARK position 3 Turn OFF the engine and be sure to turn the key fob to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the en gine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the problem persists PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate Only second gear will operate in the DRIVE position Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has bee
263. es for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed STARTING AND OPERATING 411 Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven 055007576 1 Worn Tir
264. ety Warning 176 o Disconnecting The Rear Camera If Bed Bede IE ed nn SEE 177 so igo ed ep ea E a RR RE Hop 187 3 Bed Rail Tie Down System u oou gg EMCI EE s O Locking Tailgate If Equipped 189 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control lever under the mirror to the night position lever flipped toward the rear of vehicle A Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 The mirror should be adjusted with the lever set in the day position lever flipped toward the windshield The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
265. extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Sampling NE Pit Rate bs 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported NE UNDER
266. f fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or GS high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION control button 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation LED will illuminate on the blower control knob when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the Floor Defrost Mix and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor mance make sure the engine cooling system is function ing properly and the proper amount type and
267. f ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant 526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill t
268. f it has ingested water first The key to any crossing is low and slow You want to use first gear in 4L Low Range and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed 3 5 mph 5 8 km h maximum and light throttle Keep the vehicle moving do not try to accelerate through the crossing After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion 346 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION crossing is the water depth current and bottom con ditions On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in Water ingestion into the axles transmission transfer case engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of water Water can cause permanent damage to engine driveline or other vehicle components and your brakes will be less effective once wet and or muddy e Before You Cross Any Type Of Water As you approach any type of water you need to determine if you can cross it safely and responsibly If necessary get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick You need to be sure of its depth approach angle current and bottom condition Be careful of murky or muddy waters check for hidden obstacles Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary The key to a safe effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle Be sure to consider this when determining the d
269. f reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Power Sunroof Switch Continued 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Open Sunroof Express Mode Momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature causing the sunroof to open automatically During the Express Open operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a partial open position Again momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the ope
270. fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment e Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 587 in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The re
271. fore proceeding review the path ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel bring the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it makes contact with the object Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object WARNING Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system loading which could cause you to loose control of your vehicle Using a Spotter There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path Determining the correct path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obstacles In these cases have someone guide you over through or around the obstacle Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle watch your tires and undercarriage and guide you through ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 Crossing Large Rocks When approaching large rocks choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest with your tires This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to take the abuse Always look ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires CAUTION e Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to strike your axles or underca
272. front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information Shifting Procedure NOTE e If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again e If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met the current position indicator light will turn OFF the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift When the shift is complete the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON 2WD 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With
273. g and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 407 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehi
274. g the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only N Neutral This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information 4L Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h NS TA TING AND OPERATING 319 Shifting Procedure Manually Shifted Transfer Case 2H e 4H Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion If the vehicle is in motion shifts can be made up to 55 mph 88 km h With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera tor pedal after completing the shift Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever 2H or 4H 4L With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transmission into NEUTRAL While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position Do not pause in transfer case NEUTRAL NOTE e Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may require
275. gage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position lef Center Right FirstRow Second Row ALR AR ThirdRow o If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case a
276. gerous You could accidently set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when you are not using it To Set a Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET lever downward and then release Lift your foot off the accel erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed Deactivating Electronic Speed Control A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever CANCEL toward you will deacti vate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 speed memory Pushing the ON OFF button to the OFF position or turning OFF the ignition erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed raise the Electronic Speed Control lever RESUME ACCEL upwards and release Resume can be used at any speed above 30 mph 50 km h Varying The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever If the lever is continually held in the RESUME ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released then the new set speed will be established Raising the Electronic Speed Control lever RESUME ACCEL upwards once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h speed increase E
277. ges are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belting 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Installing the Child Restraint System WARNING Do not install child restraint systems equipped with LATCH atta
278. ges when plugged into the UCI connector if supported by the specific iPod device Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode iPod audio tracks if available from iPod start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod automatically starts Play mode In Play mode use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list Turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track If the lt lt SEEK bu
279. ght monitors the electric shift SERV four wheel drive system If the SERV 4WD light stays on or comes on during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 11 TOWIHAUL The TOW HAUL button is located on the center stack upper switch bank This light will illuminate when TOW HAUL mode is selected TOW HAUL 12 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light If Equipped 8 If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP or Traction Control System TCS 13 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi c mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id 14 Oil Pressure Gauge The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure when the engine is running A continuous high or low reading under normal driving conditions
280. ground clearance or the vehicle will become high centered Getting High Centered If you get hung up or high centered on an object get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up on where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle Depend ing on what you are in contact with jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle down You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object CAUTION Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody damage Hill Climbing Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under standing of your abilities and your vehicle s limitations Hills can cause serious problems Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities You should always climb hills straight up and down Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle e Before Climbing A Steep Hill As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness Determine if it is too steep Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail Is the trail straight up and down What is on top and the other side Are there ruts rocks branches or other obstacles on the path Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong If everything looks good and you feel conf
281. h the pedals Continued ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be
282. harging system to power a motor that winds wire rope into the winch drum via planetary gear reduc tion By nature a winch is capable of generating very high forces and should be used with care Do not operate the winch without reading and understanding the com plete winch owner s manual Tensioning the Wire Rope The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use Follow the instructions below to tension the rope 1 Un spool the wire rope leaving five wraps of rope on the winch drum ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 2 Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point CAUTION Be certain the anchor will withstand the load re quired to tension the wire rope 3 Apply at least 500 Ibs 227 kg of tension to the rope while winding the rope Always use care to ensure the rope does not pile up on one side of the drum and is neatly wound onto the drum CAUTION Wire rope must spool on the winch drum in the direction indicated on the drum rotation decal on the winch Low Voltage Interrupt Your winch is equipped with a device that will interrupt winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage drops to a low level The winch will not power in or out for 30 seconds if this device is tripped If the interrupt is tripped the vehicle should be operated at high idle for a few minutes to allow the vehicle charging system to recover before continuing to winch Winch Motor Thermal Protection Your winch is equipped with a t
283. he anchor point with a tree trunk protector or choker chain Attach the clevis shackle Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap chain being careful not to over tighten tighten and back off 1 2 turn POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 379 CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature
284. he battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 1 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal 2 distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmit
285. he coolant recovery bottle Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing e If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527 WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a
286. he radio NOTE During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped with outside temperature display the display may show higher temperatures than the outside ambient tempera ture The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient tempera ture sensor caused by the snowplow In addition on vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control ATC it is suggested that the interior cabin temperature be manually controlled should the system not perform as desired while in automatic mode Both the outside tem perature display and ATC operation will return to nor mal when the snowplow is removed Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 Front Blower Control There are four blower speeds Use this control to regulate the amount of air ey forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move the control 045632841 clockwise from the OFF position NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the OFF position 045632839 1 Front Blower 4 DEFROST Mode 2 Temperature Control 5 Air Condit
287. he risk of tire dam age and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure drive at slower speeds and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers Vehicle Recovery If you drive off road you may encounter a situation where you will need to recover your vehicle Vehicle recovery should always be given consideration before attempting a questionable obstacle You should never go off road driving without the ability to recover your vehicle from a situation Having another vehicle with you usually works best for most situations The first thing to do is assess the situation Why are you stuck Are you hung up on something Would it be easier to go forward or to go backward Can you still move the vehicle Is there an anchor point to winch to Are you alone or do you have another vehicle to help Is there high risk of vehicle damage during the recovery process Answering these questions will help you determine the best method of recovery If you can still move the vehicle slightly and the only issue is slick ground then rock cycling your vehicle would be the first choice If you have ample room an additional vehicle and there is low risk of ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 vehicle impingement on the surroundings then using a tow strap to the vehicle tow hooks would be fast and easy If the vehicle is severely hung up or in a situation where great care needs to be ta
288. he size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 398 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction
289. he trailer tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for further information When TSC is functioning the ESP TCS Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in the Partial Off or Full Off modes 396 STARTING AND OPERATING TSC is only active in the default ESP On mode TSC can TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION be disabled by pressing the ESP OFF switch and entering ESP Partial Off mode It is not active in the ESP Partial Off or ESP Off modes Refer to the ESP portion of this section for an explanation of the different ESP operating modes WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle Tire Markings down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway SEP 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Tread wear Traction and Temperature Grades ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S e Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding t
290. hermal protection device in the motor If the winch is operated for an excessive duration the device may interrupt motor function to protect the winch motor During this time the winch will power out but will not power in Allow the winch motor to cool for a few minutes before continuing to winch The winch will resume normal function once the motor cools 360 STARTING AND OPERATING NNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Understanding The Features Of Your Winch 814a6beb Winch Components ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 1 Motor The winch motor is powered by the vehicle charging system and features a thermal protection switch that automatically stops motor function in the power in direction if the motor gets too hot 2 Remote Socket The remote socket allows the remote control to be attached to the control pack to allow the winch to function 3 Winch Drum with Integral Brake The winch drum allows the wire rope to be stored on the winch and transmits force to the wire rope The winch is equipped with an integral brake that will stop rotation of the winch drum if the winch motor is stopped 4 3 Stage Planetary Gear Set Provides balance between speed and pulling power Wire Rope The wire rope allows the winch to be connected to an anchor to provide a pulling force 6 Clutch Lever The clutch lever allows the winch drum to be disconnected from the winch motor to allow the wire rope to be pulled from the winch by
291. hermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle rearward Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is used when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Tow ing in Starting and Operating and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range is for most city and highway driving 2 Second This range is for moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pavement or in mud and snow Begins at a stop in low gear with automatic upshift to second gear Will not shift to third gear 306 STARTING AND OPERATING M 1 First This range is for hard pulling at low speeds in mud sand snow or on steep grades Begins and stays in low gear with no upshift Provides engine compression braking at low speeds Overdrive Operation The Overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec tronically controlled fourth gear OVERDRIVE The transmission will automatically shift from third gear to OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in DRIVE e
292. hook loop being careful not to over tighten tighten and back off 1 2 turn 81490116 Clevis D Shackles 8 Lock the clutch Lock the winch drum by rotating the clutch lever on the winch to engage 370 STARTING AND OPERATING ee NOTE Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or disengaged 9 Connect the remote control to the winch control box located behind the front bumper Be careful not to let the remote control cord dangle in front of the winch If you choose to control the winch from inside your vehicle always pass the remote through a window to avoid pinching the cord in the door Always disconnect the remote control when not in use 314247305 10 Put wire rope under tension Using the remote con trol switch slowly wind the wire rope until no slack remains Once the wire rope is under tension stand well clear of it and never step over it ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 12 Check wire rope The wire rope should be neatly wound around the spooling drum Improper winding can cause damage to the wire rope 81424738 11 Check your anchor Make sure all connections are secured and free of debris before continuing with the winching procedure 372 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 13 In certain situations you may decide to throw a heavy blanket or similar object over the wire rope A heavy blan ket can absorb energy should the wire rope break Place it on the wire rope midway be tween the winch an
293. ial for automatic transmission overheat ing turn the TOW HAUL feature ON when driving in hilly areas or select a lower gear range using the Electronic Range Select ERS feature on more severe erades 458 STARTING AND OPERATING M Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily SNOWPLOW 1500 Models Only NOTE Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow applications WARNING Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment should not be added to the front end of your vehicle The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure The airbags could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a colli sion resulting in serious injury or death ee STARTING AND OPERATING 459 CAUTION Dodge Body Builders Guide See your authorized dealer installer or snowplow manufacturer for this information
294. ice 138 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate the tires filter J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate the tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary I Lube the front drive shaft fitting Replace the top row of spark plugs 4 7L Engine 2500 3500 4x4 models only Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only I Inspect exhaust system including Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary isolators Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road snow plowing or frequent trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system including isolators M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 577 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer 150 Months Maintenance to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions Service Schedule wa
295. ich may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539 Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft tissue FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The totally integrated power module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart 072905883 5 Totally Integrated Power Module TI
296. icle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 24 Oil Pressure Warning Light wi This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound f
297. ident then change trans mission into a lower gear shift the transfer case into 4L Low and proceed with caution You should use first gear and 4L Low Range for very steep hills Driving Up Hill Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropri ate gear line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill Do not race forward into a steep grade the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control If the front end begins to bounce ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a Vi turn quickly back and forth This will provide a NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 343 fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb If you do not make it to the top place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes WARNING Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade Driving across an incline increases the risk of a roll over which may result in severe injury e Driving Down Hill Before driving down a ste
298. iding through the drive route mile by mile turn by turn until the final destina tion is reached To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Park Assist System The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF through the EVIC To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Refer to Rear Park Assist System in Understanding The Features Of Your Ve hicle for system function and operating information Auto Lock Doors When this feature is selected all doors will lock auto matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Auto Unlock Doors When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the trans
299. ights will flash continuously until all requirements are 11 Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle met or until the NEUTRAL button is released 12 Start the engine e The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a 15 Press and hold the brike pedal transfer case shift to take place and for the position l l indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is 14 Release the parking brake not in the ON position the shift will not take place and 15 Shift the transmission into DRIVE release the brake O Position indicator lights will be on or flashing pedal and check that the vehicle operates normally e The flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indi cates that shift requirements have not been met 470 STARTING AND OPERATING xe WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle CAUTION e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case and fluid loss will
300. iie noie bete pce 584 Washers Windshield 121 518 VWashune Velde 25 0 5 2 aot 602684 KAR RRE DE 535 Water Driving DDEOUPDE 224408 gone ac pei ia 354 Wheel and Wheel Trim ess 536 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 536 Wheel Cover uoa dm EE NUR EGGS ARIE ES ud 487 Wheel Nut Torue s 232m RED RE EER 488 Winch MR AA RE ART OO AE HE EG 358 Accessories ers 362 ODSIIHOIE eave a tee eee OG VL UO eee Pob d 363 Rigging Teebniques seg ses socia re S Cae oben 376 Uo TERME 358 Wind Butletne sa EE 494 titi Ry det 37 151 Window POSSE s maem a quond HE RR Re DE 289 ELON eu su bes An E RS ae E ARX PAGE RS Y ki 34 ro o AacT T c 34 Real diie 44323 9x tede doe VF EET ERES 170 608 INDEX NEE Id Windshield Defroster 5 229 2 9 dx RES 82 Windshield Washers 120 121 518 BIB 2403 392023 99b EER REED AR N AE 120 518 Windshield Wiper Blades 518 Windshield Wipers 44 sug a eat af cbr ew aes 120 Wiper Blade Replacement 518 WEDGES liter iden 5 22 45 oof Se EER OS Gas 120 SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC AR 10D241 126 AC 3rd Edition Printed in U S A
301. ility Pro gram ESP in this section of this manual This brake pressure modulation transfers drive torque from slipping to non slipping wheels to provide optimal forward traction 386 STARTING AND OPERATING M Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The BAS detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes The system applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency braking conditions This can help reduce braking dis tances The BAS complements the ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of BAS you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING e The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must
302. ill lock and reduce the risk of you WARNING Continued striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make WARNING your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or an ed of part of the belt Follow these instructions to outside of a vehicle Ina collision people riding In wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision best Continued 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the fro
303. image of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to check entire surroundings displayed across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear 5 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the audio screen appears again OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The overhead console is located on the headliner above the review mirror The overhead console contains the following features e Courtesy Reading Lights e Power Sunroof Switch If Equipped e Power Sliding Rear Window Switch If Equipped e Universal Garage Door Opener If Equipped UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 RKE transmitter if equipped These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pressing on the corresponding lens Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a Front Courtesy Reading Lights door is opened when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position full right position or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Passenger Courtesy Reading Light NOTE The courtesy reading lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle If the interior lights are left on
304. in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unabl
305. in the hook located on the fuel filler door CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap e A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system e A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 438 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines s that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator wil
306. inate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 18 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE In vehicles with 4 7L or 5 7L engines the highest available transmission gear is displayed in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC whenever the Electronic Range Select ERS fea ture is active Use the selector on the shift lever to activate ERS Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting And Operating for further information 19 Low Fuel
307. ing slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 326 STARTING AND OPERATING M 3 While still rolling rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine either OFF or running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear NOTE e If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift then the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is ON until all requirements have been met e The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Five Position Switch If Equipped This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch Transfer Case Switch which is located on the instrument panel
308. ion They should both go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or BAS system or both If ee STARTING AND OPERATING 395 this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Light will come on momentarily each time the igni tion switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal The sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation Trailer Sway Control TSC If Equipped The TSC system uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appro priate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow t
309. ion switch is turned ON 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights do not turn off if the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position extreme right posi tion e The illuminated entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the extreme left position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held radio transmitter with integrated key The transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter however the buttons on the remaining RKE transmitters will continue to work Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters 020207434 Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 To Unlock the Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you progr
310. ioning A C 3 MODE Control 6 RECIRCULATION Control 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger yy compartment Rotating the knob coun terclockwise from top center into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler 045632845 temperatures Rotating the knob clock wise into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumu lation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribu tion You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular mode the more air distribution you receive from that mode Panel Mode p Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow Bi Level Mode gt e Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets J 045632842 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 NOTE There is a difference in temperature in any conditions o
311. is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently For states that require an Inspection and Mainte serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can procee
312. it Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 125 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG Specification Sampling Frequency KHz Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning
313. it aura E ges erbe aa es 15 Keyless Entry System ee ie proe 19 deor RE 20 RAT HORE OES Gases ee se x 12 Lane Change and Turn Signals 118 Lane Change Assist 4 224 KERR EER RE S 119 Loo DUS serie RR GR oe HE RR see ee a 47 Lap Shoulder Belts 33 23 8239 2369 ite RR SR 38 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for Allen TT 70 Enc DT Gone eee esas RE 84 Leaks Fluid io doe wg eo n54 Gas NE ENSE ee 84 Liesl ILES om scettr shies has ERU ees eee es 411 ide ie 4644426 a ee oe ee ee eens og aes 84 Iran ode KERS REIK EERS SR OR ARE SE 84 112 PUGS wise OUD RED DER RE RAS 59 64 82 214 PUAN m 203 DADOS aucuns ue P Edda Ee Abe S 214 Anti Lock Warning oes esr e HR EES 383 A tomane ble dl iS iss 23 Sore dox dh HEDE 113 Drake Waring uda edm od timi dues 209 Bite Replacement oe eue v rep deua vr ae ees 545 Cap Iob Clearanee genta aa gi dene Bardem dod d 551 EG uan due S RARR d PP MEME duet EE E S 17 Center Mounted Stop 1d R3 RR RR RAS 550 Check Engine Malfunction Indicator 213 Courtesy Reading i44 4 4 35909 de RR RE RE s 141 TODOS RUNMINE sou 4 gos a re wed bui gen 118 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 391 EX CMOE sien cte S PRA S PIRE NO ees HR us 84 FOG 22932322949 0 st canes ess oe 3 114 214 548 Four Wheel Drive Indicator 320 N INDEX 599 Hazard Warming Flasher si is ee r4 9e 472 EIS Do DES aos 62324 REDE AR Gaon ee eos 113 Lis Bean ooa ie Ge ED P TERES EA 119 208 High Beam Indicator o
314. itch ball assembly is disconnected image of the rear of your vehicle whenever the shift lever from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the towing Failure to do so can result in injury or Navigation Multimedia radio display screen The Park damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch View camera is located next to the tailgate handle on the ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the tear of the vehicle rear bumper when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the ParkSense sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Park View Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to CAUTION Continued e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park View to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom mended that the driver look frequently over his check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob her shoulder when using ParkView structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Fail
315. itch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 WARNING Continued operation with the Transmission Tem perature Warning Light illuminated could cause the 30 Transmission Temperature Warning Light This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition such as 4 wheel drive operation e g snow plowing off road operation If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure fluid to boil over come in cont
316. ivated Wiper Mode If Equipped When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated When this feature is deactivated the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Easy Exit Seat If Equipped When this feature is selected it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when enter ing and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark ap pears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Tilt Mirror In Reverse When this feature is selected and the shift lever is placed in reverse gear the side mirrors tilt downward to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELEC
317. jury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 449 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a 4 Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK For four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL Always block or chock the trailer wheels Towing Requirements Tires utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight GCWR must not be exceeded e Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact mm Total weight must be distributed between the tow spare tire vehicle and the trailer such that the following four 1 GVWR and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to 2 GTW Tires General Information in Starting and Oper GAWR ating for proper tire inflation procedures Continued Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage 450 STARTING AND OPERATING M e Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic Information in Starting and
318. kSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST DISABLED mes sage for as long as the vehicle is in reverse ParkSense when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone If a ParkSense system malfunction occurs a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS and the LED in the ParkSense switch will illuminate If this message continues to appear in the Electronic Vehicle 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Information Center EVIC after making sure the rear bumper is clean and free of snow ice mud or other debris see your authorized dealer Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the bumper Objects must not be within 12 in 30 cm from the rear bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the CLEAN PARK ASSIS
319. ken during the recovery then nothing can do the job better than a winch If you are severely hung up on something you should jack the vehicle up and stack something under the wheels to allow the vehicle to roll off the object without causing further damage This should be tried before attempting any recovery method CAUTION Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle without first clearing the object may result in additional under body damage e Rock Cycling Your Vehicle Rock cycling your ve hicle is one of the easiest fastest and most commonly used methods This simply involves shifting your vehicle from DRIVE to REVERSE while applying throttle after each shift During this process for addi tional traction try turning your steering wheel quickly back and forth no more than a 1 4 turn If you are stuck in mud sand or snow try spinning your tires during this process to clean the debris from the tread and improve the traction You want to create a rocking motion with the vehicle This helps build vehicle momentum which hopefully gets you out Remember to ease off and on the accelerator before and after the shift If after a few rock cycles your vehicle is not free stop and try another method of recovery Continuous rock cycling will only cause unnecessary damage to your vehicle and the environment 350 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an excessive high speed Do not
320. ker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage To switch from odometer to trip odometers press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button To reset a trip odometer display the desired trip odom eter to be reset then push and hold the button for approximately two seconds until the display resets Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the following messages will display in the odometer ECO uos owns gu HR SS Fuel Saver Indicator Off ECO ON Fuel Saver Indicator On EO PITE oue E aedem Geo d qr RR Low Tire Pressure noFUSE een Fuse Fault CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required LoWASH essen Low Washer Fluid NOTE There is also an engine hour function This indicates the total number of hours the engine has been running To display the engine hours on the base cluster perform the following Place the ignition in RUN but do not start the engine With the odometer value displayed hold the TRIP button down for a period of six seconds The odometer will change to trip value first then it will display the engine hour value The engine hours will be displayed for a period of 30 seconds until the ignition is turned OFF or the engine is started If equipped some of the above warnings will be dis played in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in th
321. kes will still function However you will experience a substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal braking capability the remaining system will still func tion with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during applica tion greater pedal force required to slow or stop and activation of the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light if equipped during brake use 382 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id 3500 Dual Rear Wheel Models Only The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro boost unit which shares fluid with the power steering system You may experience some clicking or hissing noises from the hydro boost system during hard braking conditions NOTE Under cold temperatures pedal effort will be higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches operating temperature Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System WARNING The Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment It may be sus ceptible to interference caused by improperly in stalled or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals The Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS is de signed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control
322. l BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the ligh
323. l display in the EVIC telltale display area Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started ee STARTING AND OPERATING 439 VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the Month Day and Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options and cargo The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the
324. l parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system including isolators M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 574 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet snow plowing or frequent trailer towing Replace the accessory drive belt s Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect exhaust system including isolators M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer
325. l the bed extender into the extender position perform the following 1 Lower the tailgate 2 Make sure the center handle is unlocked and rotate the center handle vertically in order to release the extender side gates 3 Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin and handle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 036706571 EN Extender Installation Locking Tab 4 Rotate the handles to the horizontal position to secure into place 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Bed Rail Tie Down System CAUTION The maximum load per cleat should not exceed To reduce the risk of potential injury or property damage Cargo must be secured Do not exceed cargo load rating of your vehicle Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie downs Extender should not be used as cargo tie down 250 Ibs 113 kg and the angle of the load on each cleat should not exceed 60 degrees above horizontal or damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur When vehicle is in motion do not exceed 150 lbs There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed 68 kg load on the tailgate that can be used to assist in securing cargo The bed extender is not intended for off road use When not in use the extender divider should be in stowed or divider position with the tailgate closed When in use all handles are to be in the locked position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 out on the
326. l to gt vehicle interior is very on and blower on high Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out wis the hot air Once comfort is achieved adjust controls for comfort Turn re on and set the mode control to the 9 position Cool Sunny Operate in gh position Cool amp Humid conditions amp 66 Set the mode control to 4 Pd and turn on see 646 to keep windows clear Set the mode control to the y position If windshield Cold Weather fogging starts to occur move the control towards the We position 8000cb71 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS W Starting Procedures uus mes edie Hae dees 297 3 Brake Transmission Interlock Manual O Normal rare 312 32 3 4 598 RR ER OU E HE 297 WR J Automatic Transmission eS Olf Engine Fails To Start sis kak PE eg shan 298 4 Five Speed Automatic Transmission If Aer EENS he 9099 99 heheh eee EE A 299 EIU a ees 4a ened EES qa S dE 308 Mi Engine Block Heater If Equipped 299 W Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped 316 M Automatic Transmission 300 3 Manually Shifted Transfer Case If OKey Ignition Park Interlock 301 AE EG le O Shifting Procedure Manually Shifted O Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 301 ES e a AS N en EEN 319 202 STARTING AND OPERATING ee o Transfer Case Position Indicator Light oO Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Four Position Switch
327. l when the reading is at engine transmission power steering or air condi the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the tioning Such damage is not covered by the New top of the safe zone on these engines Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed CAUTION because of component malfunction use only the Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause specified fluid for the flushing procedure oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the Change Engine Oil engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information 512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum
328. lashing arc and sounds a continuous tone N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES PINE P Nee Nme 39 3 in 100 cm 15 7 in 40 cm NOTE ParkSense will MUTE the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Enable Disable ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with a switch located in the switch bank of the instrument panel or through the Customer Programmable Features section of the EVIC The available choices are OFF Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features SETUP in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Park Assist Switch When the switch is pressed to disable the system the instrument cluster will display the PARK ASSIST DIS ABLED message for approximately five seconds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST DISABLED message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE The switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is disabled or defective The switch LED will be OFF when Park Sense is enabled Servic
329. lative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 588 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden ti
330. ld rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations for Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment behind the left headlight assembly WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493 NOTE The positive battery post is covered with a WARNING protective cap Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive battery post e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery b 060809873 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission Positive Battery Post into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park CAUTION the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle Do not allow vehicles to touch ea
331. le some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately six to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on
332. le the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions 522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will
333. lear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will display during this three second window Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Info displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the available information displays then press SELECT to display anyone of the following choices e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature e Oil Temperature If Equipped Displays the actual oil temperature e Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Trans Temperature If Equipped Displays the actual transmission temperature e Engine Hours Displays the hours of engine operation NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 NE 83 F FM 101 9 Tire Pressure 28 ma 29 29 X 30 e Trailer Brake If Equipped Displays trailer brake output power and trailer brake status indicator Tire PSI Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Tire PSI displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button This will display the Tire Pressure Monitor System shows the current pressure of all four road tires For additional information refer to Tire Pressure Monitor System in Starting And Operating 96789 mi 041009835 Ti
334. ler for any advanced airbag system ser vice If your seat including your trim cover and Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued ries may be used If it is necessary to modify the airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in a collision While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for approximately
335. lete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4
336. lid Crew Cab Storage 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers Regular Cab Models Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the back panel of the cab behind the rear seat Grocery Bag Hooks REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 CAUTION Power Sliding Rear Window If Equipped The switch for the power sliding rear window is located Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to on the overhead console Press the left side of the switch the heating elements to open the glass and the right side of the switch to close e Use care when washing the inside of the rear the glass window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on F the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be pe
337. limited slip oil additive friction modifiers Transfer Case Drain and Refill Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531 Fluid Level Check This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only the manufacturer s recommended trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION e Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants
338. lling situation You will have to assess what technique is correct for your situation Think safety at all times How to Change the Pulling Direction 814a0601 Change Pulling Directions All winching operations should have a straight line from the winch to the object being pulled This minimizes the wire rope collecting on one side of the drum affecting pulling efficiency and damaging wire rope A snatch block secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING will enable you to change your pulling direction while still allowing the wire rope to be at 90 to wind properly onto the spooling drum Increasing Pulling Power In some cases you may find yourself needing more pulling power The use of snatch blocks increases me chanical advantage and that increases your pulling power 377 Double Line 81424734 Because pulling power decreases with the number of layers of wire rope on the winch drum you can use a snatch block to double line out more wire rope This decreases the number of layers of wire rope on the drum and increases pulling power Start by feeding out enough wire rope to free the winch hook Attach the hook to your 378 STARTING AND OPERATING M vehicle s frame tow hook and run the wire rope through NOTE a snatch block Disengage the clutch and using the snatch block pull out enough wire to reach your anchor point Do not attach the hook to the mounting kit Secure to t
339. llow the axle to fully lock If the indicator light is flashing after placing the switch in the REAR LOCK or FRONT REAR LOCK position drive the ve hicle in a turn or on loose gravel to expedite the locking action eee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 WARNING Do not use the locked axle position for normal driving A locked front axle is intended for off road driving only Locking the front axle during on road driving will reduce the steering ability This could cause an accident and you may be seriously injured To lock the front axle move the axle locker switch to FRONT REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph 5 km h The indicator light will be solid when the front axle is locked NOTE The rear axle must be locked before the front axle will lock To unlock the front axle move the axle locker switch to REAR LOCK The FRONT REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the axle is unlocked NOTE The axle lockers could be torque locked due to side to side loads on the axle Driving slowly while turning the steering wheel from a left hand turn to a right hand turn or driving in REVERSE for a short distance may be required to release the torque lock and unlock the axles To unlock the rear axle move the axle locker switch to AXLE UNLOCK The REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the rear axle is unlocked SAFE OFF ROAD DRIVING POWER WAGON ONLY Off Road Driving Tips and Vehicle Characteristics Your vehicle has ex
340. lowed Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil l filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended 514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessa
341. ly during an ing impact that requires airbag deployment The timing of Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in the second stage determines whether the output force is any way low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the remaining gas in the inflator is expended covers or attempt to open them manually You may Continued WARNING Continued e Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC airbags may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 I d re s t mud 022606595 ro mad Side Curtain Airbag Label Location NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that reguire airbag occupant protection 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e If your vehicle is
342. m Play N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character
343. m Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine in an emergency it should be replaced with the coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up possible to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before Continued 524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is o
344. may indicate a lubrication system malfunction Immediate service should be obtained from an authorized dealer 15 OdometerlTrip Odometer Button ECO Fuel Saver Indicator Button If Equipped Press this button to toggle between the odometer display trip odometer display or the ECO display Holding the button in resets the trip odometer reading when in trip mode If equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the ECO message will be displayed in the EVIC display in the instrument cluster Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 16 Odometer Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Area If Equipped Odometer Display The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb stic
345. ment panel to switch the headlights to high beam Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on or shut the high beams off 031505790 High Low Beam Switch ay 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wipers The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction lever Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper speed A 1 E an uu keh ae a NS Windshield Wiper Washer Switch 031505791 Intermittent Wiper System The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable For maximum delay between cycles rotate the control knob into the upper end of the delay range The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it enters the low continual speed position The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every one second The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Windshield Washers To use the windshield washer push the washer knob located on the end of the multifunction lever inward to the second detent Washer fluid will be sprayed until the washer knob is released from this position If the washer knob is
346. ment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for the purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to the main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed Four Wheel Drive Vehicles The transfer case must be in the NEUTRAL position and the transmission must be in PARK to tow a four wheel drive vehicle unless all four wheels are OFF the ground Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operat ing for further information The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly CAUTION Failure to follow these towing methods could result in damage to the transfer case Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Two Wheel Drive Vehicles If the transmission is operable the vehicle may be towed with the transmission in NEUTRAL Speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h and the distance must not exceed 15 miles 24 km N WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 499 CAUTION Towing faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km can cause severe damage to the transmission Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited W
347. mes oul Disposal is qoe vee HAD as Hee ees 4 519 N INDEX 601 j AE ee EE IE TEG 015 557 Puer Disposal usse a oe priki PRED ES 519 Iden gcdlon OPE od doc dd dE AUR RA Er RP 512 Materials Added to si he ede ar Up Ce onc oo 515 Presstte Gauge said od ED xa e e Vp eps 204 Recommendation een 512 555 viendo PPP T te DRA eas ee ae 513 VISCOSUY reptere chee thd dad c edd EE 512 555 Onboard Diagnostic System a Feed vem s 507 508 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 142 Operating PISSQHBONS say vue qe eo e544 POR amii 907 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors ss saw bbe oe isau 92 Gere 654 5 SEE ee OER HE SE 306 313 Overdrive OFF Switch 306 313 Overhead Console EE EE EE Ee 140 Overhieatis Eise x pss oer RE Tu pa HEY 201 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 585 Ianue dia 44532558 on eos en ae PIOS ES 24 Park Sense System Kear a os oe EE RR RR peas 128 Parkuie Brake ese deseen 9 3 agen cee ene 380 Dassie LIEDE oo owen ate dex mur a ee eR EDE 119 Pedals Adj staDle srao veto Saga d qa des MED ks 124 Personal Series uev sace exce dre oro s 233 Pes pees oe EE HE pS E ees AE 9 Pets JranspoPHE 2 20 30838 9336369 de doin eto d d 79 Phone Cellular issie Ere uae Yee erue 98 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 98 Diek DOS usce n ha Grane RD OE oe DEE 172 Placard Tire and Loading Information 402 Power Door LOCKS 4 92x ER
348. mission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Remote Unlock Sequence When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high lighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected RKE Linked To Memory When this feature is selected the memory seat mirror and radio settings will return to the memory set position when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed If this feature is not selected then the memory seat mirror and radio settings can only return to the memory set position using the seat mounted switch To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has bee
349. month 7 e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint ofthe doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and finish open 536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or e
350. n added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages Five Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped The shift lever display located in the instrument panel cluster indicates the transmission gear range The shift lever is mounted either on the right side of the steering column if equipped or on the floor console if equipped You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position Pull the shift lever toward you when shifting into REVERSE or PARK or when shifting out of PARK Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows you to limit the highest available gear when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position Move the console shift lever left or right or toggle the switch on the column shift lever down or up to select the desired top gear For example if the driver shifts the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but can shift down to 2 second gear or 1 first gear when needed Column Shift Lever STARTING AND OPERATING 309 0512
351. n accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Fluid Level Check The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood service or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic reservoir On the outboard side of the reservoir there is a MAX dot and an MIN dot The fluid level must be kept within these two dots Do not add fluid above the MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap 528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake linings wear However an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted Use only the manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi nal fact
352. n activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Remote Start Comfort Sys When this feature is selected and the remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the key is turned to RUN To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button is pressed To make your selection press and release the 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Horn With Remote Lock When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamps with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark ap pears next to the feature showing the system has been activa
353. n on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons on the driver s seat during a recall 5 1 or 2 or pressing any one of the power seat buttons pressing the adjustable pedals button or pressing either the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter when not in the ignition switch When a recall is can celled the driver s seat and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 NOTE Achime sound may be heard if setting memory was inhibited for any reason To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the Key 2 Press and release the memory SET button located on the driver s seat 3 Within 10 seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either memory position repeat Steps 1 3 for each RKE trans mitter NOTE The capability to link RKE transmitters to memory is enabled when delivered from the factory The capability to link RKE transmitters to memory can be disabled or later re enabled by an authorized dealer For vehicles equipped with the Electronic vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for fur
354. n switch 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the System Setup Customer Programmable Features menu is reached then press the SELECT button 3 Press the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will be displayed in the EVIC 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading For the most accurate compass performance the compass must be set using the following steps NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Cell Phones Lap tops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 7 8 9 Compass Variance Map LA 040506040 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the System Setup Customer Programmable Features menu is r
355. n tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read sion components You could lose control and have ings an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION Never use a tire with a smaller load index or IF EQUIPPED capacity other than what Was originally equipped A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load gers 150 lbs 68 kg each plus 200 lbs 91 kg of cargo index could result in tire overloading and failure Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle You could lose control and have an accident will be found on the face of the driver s door Continued 414 STARTING AND OPERATING See Use Class S chains or other traction aids that meet SAE CAUTION Continued Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important
356. nchor Strap Ring s 2 Snap Hook 3 Tether Strap 4 Passenger s Side Rear Child Seat 5 Rear Center Child Seat 6 Driver s Side Rear Child Seat 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Crew Cab 1 The tether straps loops are located between the rear glass and the rear seat There is a tether strap loop located behind each seating position You can gain access to the center seating position tether strap loop by raising the head restraint and reaching between the rear glass and rear seat 022606561 Head Restraint Adjustment 2 Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head restraint through the outboard tether strap loop then route it to the tether strap loop located directly behind the center rear seat N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 3 Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat 4 Route each tether strap through the tether strap loop behind the center seat and attach the hooks to the anchor located directly behind the center rear seat located under a plastic cover 5 Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head restraint through the center seat tether strap loop and anchor to the tether strap loop located behind either outboard seating positions 6 Install each child res
357. nd the shock bracket with the 2 Before raising the wheel off the ground make sure drive tubes extending to the rear that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required 060606563 Rear Jacking Location 484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M e 2500 3500 Series Trucks Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel For 2500 3500 4x2 series trucks when changing a front wrench The tube extension may be used but is not wheel place the bottle jack under the frame rail behind required the wheel Locate the jack as far forward as possible on the straight part of the frame For 2500 3500 4x4 series trucks when changing the front wheel assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle as close to the tire as possible with the drive tubes extending to the front Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench 060609051 4x2 Jacking Location N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485 060609073 6 4x4 Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location All For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks when changing a rear wheel assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle between the spring and the shock absorber with the drive tubes extending to the rear Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench 486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sa CAUTION Before r
358. nd then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupants mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occu pants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will con tinue to chime and flash the Seat
359. nd time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off 030905580 NOTE The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate The heated seats switch from High to Low and from Low to Off automatically based on time and temperature of the seat The heated seats can operate on High heat for as little as 4 minutes and up to 30 minutes before switching to Low heat Once a seat has switched to the Low heat setting it may operate for an additional 60 minutes before automatically shutting Off The heated seats can shut Off early or may not turn on when the seat is already warm NOTE The drivers heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 WARNING Continued e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates Press the switch once to choose High press it a second time to choose Low Pressing the switch a third time will against h
360. ndow to avoid pinching lead in door then using remote inside a vehicle protector on the anchor Never attach a recovery strap to the winch hook to increase the length of a pull Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovery General Information strap attached directly to the winch hook Practice using your winch before you get stuck Some key Never use bungee straps that develop tremen Points to remember when using your winch are dous and potentially dangerous amounts of force when stretched Never leave the remote control plugged into the winch while free spooling rigging or sitting idle 1 Always take your time to assess the situation and plan your pull carefully Continued NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 365 2 Always take your time when using a winch Vehicle Recovery Using the Winch 3 Use the right equipment for the situation CAUTION 4 Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the wire rope to slip through your hands when handling the rope Always Know Your Winch Take the time to fully read and understand the included Installation and 5 Only the operator should handle the wire rope and Operations Guide and Basic Guide to Winching remote control Techniques in order to understand your winch and the winching operation 6 Think safety at all times Always inspect winch installation and wire rope condition before operating the winch Frayed kinked or damaged wire rope must be
361. never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others NS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 387 Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in launching a vehicle on an incline HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short duration the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the incline The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied During operation HSA will activate the brake control system and a clicking noise may occur If your foot is on the brake pedal during operation you may feel a slight pedal movement The clicking and pedal movement is normal and both will stop when HSA becomes inactive HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 7 or greater incline e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 7 With a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer where the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur which could cause a collision wi
362. ngs information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the to
363. ning of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof To close the sunroof from the vented position press forward on the sunroof switch Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized
364. nnot be reset through the RETURN button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 10 miles 16 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display Trip Functions Press and release the ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time Press the ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See e Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press for approximately two seconds and release the ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER button once to c
365. nt 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch seat next to your arm in the rear seat Grasp the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap Latch Plate To Buckle Y Pulling Out Latch Plate And Webbing N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING WARNING Continued e A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 42 THIN
366. nt Air 1 Driver and Passenger Air 2 Knee Boltser bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The 228 000000 00000000000 passenger s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal instrument panel above the glove compartment The regulations for Advanced Airbags words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 022605555 N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a win dow If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags they are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment
367. nter 130 RES Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control kno
368. ny condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not ra diator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reser voir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519 WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution After the engine has warmed up operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield Windshield washer solution used with water as directed on the container aids cleaning action reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging and is not harmful to paint or trim Exhaust System The best protection against c
369. ny trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Integrated Trailer Brake Module If Equipped Your vehicle may have a Integrated Trailer Brake Module ENE for electric trailer brakes 1 GAIN Brake Output Power Display 2 Manual Brake Control Lever 3 Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light 4 GAIN Adjustment Buttons 452 STARTING AND OPERATING ee The user interface consists of the following GAINI Brake Output Power Display Shows the current GAIN setting This display may also be used to display diagnostic information if needed e SC Short Circuit to Ground e 5b Short to Battery e CF Controller Fault If this message appears on the display see your authorized dealer When the vehicle brakes are applied the display will no longer show GAIN and will change to the output to the trailer brakes Manual Brake Control Lever Slide the manual brake control lever to the right to activate power to the trailer s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle s brakes If the manual brake control lever is activated while the brake is also applied the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes The trailer and the vehicle s brake lamps will come on when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are applied
370. o and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE 3 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib ith Occupant 3 160 Ibs AER 100 Ibs 3S Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 405 406 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexin
371. of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler Group LLC such investigations may be re quested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC regardless of initiative the com pany or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to image the data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the U S govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group
372. oid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the operation of a cellular phone in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy perfor mance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repo sitioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the temperature amount and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The controls are located on the instrument panel below t
373. ol ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position the light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 8 4WD Indicator This light indicates the vehicle is in four wheel AWD drive and 4LOCK 4WD allows all four wheels to receive torque from the engine simulta neously 9 4WD Auto Indicator The 4WD auto indicator will be illuminated whenever the four wheel drive mode is auto matically engaged 4WD AUTO 10 SERV Service 4WD The SERV 4WD li
374. omplete the training for rolling code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are having any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED NOTE The Power Accessory Delay feature will allow The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead the power sunroof to operate for approximately ten console between the courtesy reading lights minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until a front 5 gt S door is opened e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number o
375. on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the incline while resuming accelera tion manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is re sponsible for braking the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 WARNING Continued e HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK or using the parking brake it will roll down the incline and could cause a collision with an other vehicle or object Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off Non EVIC Equipped Vehicles If you wish to turn off the HSA system follow this procedure 1 Start with the engine OFF and the vehicle in PARK with the wheels straight 2 Start the engine 3 With the engine running and the brake applied rotate the steering wheel 180 counterclockwise from center 4 Press the ESP OFF switch four times within 20 sec onds The ESP TCS Indicator Light should appear and disappear four times 5 Rotate the steering wheel 360 clockwise 180 clock wise from center 6 Cycle the ignition switch OFF then ON 7 If the sequence was completed properly the ESP TCS Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm
376. onitors the vehicle doors and ignition for unauthorized operation When the Ve hicle Security Alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visible signals For the first three minutes the horn will sound and the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security Light will flash repeatedly For an additional 15 minutes only the headlights park lamps and or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash The engine will run only if a valid Sentry Key is used to start the vehicle Use of the Sentry Key will disable the alarm Rearming of the System The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security Light flashing if the system has not been disabled If the condition which initiated the alarm is still present the system will ignore that condition and monitor the re maining doors and ignition To Set the Alarm The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the power door locks or use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock the doors After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set After the alarm is set the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 NOTE If the Vehicle Security Light stays on
377. op of the engine under the coils and the second set is e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct Ee osse ore onse OM CUMTITOOU MOZLEM HIE S operation l The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard EEA EASE plug and must be changed every 48 000 miles e Change the engine oil filter 80 000 km hj Inspect the brake hoses and lines The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a premium plug and must be changed every 96 000 miles 160 000 km N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 563 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate the tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary JJ Lube the front drive shaft fitting Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary J Inspect exhaust system including Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or isolators 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system including isolators
378. operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate contro
379. or further information UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical conditions must exer cise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures espe cially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cush ion This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The power adjustable accelerator and brake pedals allow the driver to establish a comfortable position relative to the steering wheel and pedals Adjustment 1 Position the driver s seat so that you are at least 10 in 25 4 cm away from the airbag located in the center of the steering wheel 2 Fasten and adjust the seatbelts 031605590 3 Move the adjustable pedal switch located to the left side of the steering column in the direction you desire Adjustable Pedals Switch the pedals to move NOTE The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control is set NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may ca
380. or four minutes when this light turns on NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 25 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided i should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces
381. or up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF This feature is cancelled when either front door is opened Power Windows If Equipped Power Window Switches 1 Left Front 3 Right Rear 2 Right Front 4 Left Rear N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switch have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement op erate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto Down operation pull up on the switch briefly To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection 4 Door Models Driver s and Front Passenger Door Only If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window pa
382. orage under the load 4 a floor Load Floor In Open Position 3 Reverse the procedure to store the load floor 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not drive with the load floor in the up position When stopping fast or in an accident the load floor could move to the down position causing serious injury Load Floor Securing Straps 4 Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the secured down position before you operate the vehicle RAMBOX IF EQUIPPED The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box storage and cargo management system consisting of three fea tures e Integrated box side storage bins e Cargo extender divider e Bed rail tie down system RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the pickup box The cargo storage bins provide watertight lockable illuminated storage for up to 150 lbs 68 kg of evenly distributed cargo RamBox Cargo Storage Bins UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 CAUTION Failure to follow the following items could cause damage to the vehicle e Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is properly secured e Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 Ib 68 kg per bin 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie To open a storage bin press and release the button The interior of the RamBox will automatically illumi located on the lid The R
383. ory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons failure This could result in a accident the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be tion taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident This inspection should be made with the
384. our eyes The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Front and Side Impact Sensors If Equipped In front and side impacts
385. our seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC air bags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear or side collisions N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for examp
386. our vehicle in jeopardy There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle s running ground clearance You should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle s running ground clearance Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle Never drive through fast moving deep water It can push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury or drowning Airing Down For Off Road Driving Running lower tire pressure off road can improve your ride comfort and vehicle traction Reducing the tire air pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly improving its surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or 348 STARTING AND OPERATING M form to the ground contour Different terrain tires and vehicles require different tire pressure Hard surfaces like rock and heavier vehicles require higher pressures than softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles You will need to experiment to determine what is right for your situation It is easier and faster to let air out than it is to replace it so start high and lower it as required Remem ber you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on road or at highway conditions Be sure you have a way to return the tires to their normal on road air pressure CAUTION Reduced tire pressure increases t
387. outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Manual Seat Adjuster If Equipped Both front seats are independently adjustable forward or rearward and are equipped with a seatback recliner The manual forward or rearward seat adjustment handle is found at the front edge of each seat cushion Pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or backward to move the seat into the most comfortable position 030905746 Manual Seat Adjuster WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat cushion and is used to adjust the seatback position To adjust the seatback lift upward on the handle lean back l on the seatback and release the handle at the desired Recline Handle position To return the seatback lift upward on the handle lean forward and release the handle at the desired position 030905747 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
388. oved For the front hub cap on 3500 models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the caps off The wheel skin can now be removed 488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION e Use a back and forth motion to remove the hub cap Do not use a twisting motion when removing the hub cap damage to the hub cap finish may Occur The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two pry off notches Make sure that the hook of the jack handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch before attempting to pull off You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the wheel skins Insert the flat tip completely and using a back and forth motion loosen the wheel skin Repeat this procedure around the tire until the skin pops off Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet When replacing the hub caps tilt the cap retainer over the lug nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a rubber mallet Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins are firmly seated around the wheel Wheel Nuts All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated This is especially important during the first few hundred miles kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly set All wheel nuts should first be firmly seated against the wheel The wheel nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque Tighten the
389. perate it refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operating for further information All Two Wheel Drive Vehicles and Four Wheel Drive Vehicles in 2WD 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK Modes Can Choose the Following ESP Operating Modes ESP On This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 2WD 4WD AUTO 4WD LOCK modes and in 2WD vehicles When ever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOW or Neutral back to 4WD LOCK or 4WD AUTO the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for almost all driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off or ESP Off for specific reasons as noted below ESP Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESP function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily press the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Par
390. perated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that the engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525 WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground I
391. play is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features SETUP in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The ParkSense Warning Display is located in the instru When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display ment cluster s EVIC display It provides both visual and will turn ON indicating the system status audible warnings to indicate the distance between the rear bumper and the detected obstacle Park c IH Warning os Object n Detected 032807564 am am RE Rear Park Assist On 032807566 Rear ParkSense Display Park Assis Disabled 032807565 Rear Park Assist Disabled ParkSense will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a 1 2 second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Warning m ject tected E Slow Tone 032807566 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Warning Warning Ub ject Oh ject Detected Detected r vi aif 032807567 032807568 Fast Tone Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one f
392. pulling vehicle should let off the throttle without using the brakes once signaled by the other driver This sequence is important to avoid having the recov ered vehicle hit the pulling vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 WARNING Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two straps with a clevis pin These heavy metal objects could become projectiles if a strap breaks which could cause severe injury Never leave more than two or three feet of slack in the strap More slack than this greatly increases the risk of injury and vehicle dam age Always keep everyone at least 30 feet away from a strapping or winching situation out of the situation in a slow controlled manner This control works well for avoiding further vehicle dam age Once you decide it is time to use the winch look for a good anchor point It needs to be strong enough to hold more than the vehicle s weight and provide a direction of pull as straight as possible Use block and tackle if necessary to improve the angle of pull or increase the winch s pulling force If the anchor point is a tree use a strap around its base and hook the cable to the strap If it is another vehicle then place that vehicle in PARK and block the front tires If you cannot e Winching Refer to Winch Operation for addi find an anchor point within reach try using your spare tional information Winching is most commonly used in the following situations there is no suppo
393. quivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537 e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be
394. r Rotate the tires Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road snow plowing or frequent trailer towing Inspect exhaust system including isolators Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 568 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet snow plowing or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet snow plowing or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play r
395. r or at a service station N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 487 WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle Al ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel in the places provided 7 Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel blocks Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel This may result in cap damage 8 Lower the jack to its fully closed position If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial thumbwheel by hand it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack Stow the replaced tire jack and tools as previously described 9 Adjust the tire pressure when possible NOTE Do not oil wheel studs For chrome wheels do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts Hub Caps Wheel Covers If Equipped The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle off the ground For 2500 3500 single rear wheel SRW models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the hub cap off Insert the blade end into the pry off notch and carefully pop off the hub cap with a back and forth motion On 3500 models with dual rear wheels DRW you must first remove the hub caps The jack handle driver has a hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of the rear hub caps Position the hook and pull out on the ratchet firmly The hub cap should pop off The wheel skins can now be rem
396. rain damage the following precautions should be ob served e Operate with transfer case in 4L when plowing small or congested areas where speeds are not likely to exceed 15 mph 24 km h At higher speeds operate in 4H e Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4L range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended periods of time to avoid transmission overheating e Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has returned to idle and wheels have stopped Make a practice of stepping on the brake pedal before shifting the transmission RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC CAUTION Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models Recreational towing of two wheel drive models is not allowed Towing with the rear wheels on the ground can result in severe transmission damage NS 1 AR TING AND OPERATING 463 a Transfer Case If Equipped Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for will leak from the transmission and damage the recreational towing internal parts WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL posi
397. ral N e Four wheel drive low range 4L This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position for normal street and highway conditions such as dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required the 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear drive shafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by simply NS 1A TING AND OPERATING 317 moving the shift lever to the desired positions The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is in four wheel drive and that the front and rear drive shafts are locked together This light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L position There is no light for the 2H or NEUTRAL positions When operating your vehicle in 4L the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can cause damage to the transfer case NOTE
398. rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter 035005840 Power Inverter Outlet The power inverter switch is located on the switch bank below the Climate Controls To turn on the power outlet press the switch once Press the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 NOTE e When the power inverter switch is pressed there will be a delay of approximately one second before the power inverter status indicator turns on The status indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is producing AC power e Due to built in overload protection the power inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Do not use a three prong adapter Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CUPHOLDERS
399. rder Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 566 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES xe 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate the tires filter J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate the tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary L Lube the front drive shaft fitting Replace the top row of spark plugs 4 7L Engine 2500 3500 4x4 models only Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only I Inspect exhaust system including Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary isolators Inspect the CV joints Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system including isolators M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 567 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filte
400. re To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil or Refrigerants N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517 Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA and is an ozone saving product However the manufacturer recommends that air condi tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Front Driveshaft Lubrication 2500 3500 Four Wheel Drive Models Ram Trucks Only Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil change Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information Use MOPAR Type MS 6560 lithium based grease or equivalent Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect
401. re Pressure Display NOTE e Tires heat up during normal driving conditions Heat will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi 14 to 41 kPa during normal driving conditions Refer 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M to Tires General Information Tire Inflation Pres sures in Starting And Operating for additional information e Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR Units Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Units displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of mea sure To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Compass Temperature Display The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing The EVIC will display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature NOTE e The system will display the last known outside tem perature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving e During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped with outside temperatu
402. re display the display may show higher temperatures than the outside ambient tem perature The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 temperature sensor caused by the snowplow In addi tion on vehicles equipped with Automatic Tempera ture Control ATC it is suggested that the interior cabin temperature be manually controlled should the system not perform as desired while in automatic mode Both the outside temperature display and ATC operation will return to normal when the snowplow is removed Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn ON the ignitio
403. re failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 590 INDEX M Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 523 RAADOT TOEL rm 437 Adjustable Pedal 22 us x oe REK e Rem ii 124 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 514 Air Conditioner Maintenance 516 DUC ODD BO 2 uat R edeegenterenn aes ve 278 Air Conditioning Controls errer rereset are 278 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 290 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 516 917 Aur Conditioning System cs mace sev ws 278 283 516 Air Pressure Tires 000008 407 413 Dur oi EG RAAD EE ARE RIEL DRR OE 52 60 Airbag DeploySneliD s sa senemi sag WE RAS i ee 61 ANDA DID 25 at eg be Gee 59 64 82 214 Airbag NMaimtenance sesi ae ier eed ga Re RD 3c9 ed 63 eie IOS ES 5048 132 Be 3 9 9 EE ee 58 60 Airbag Window Side Curtain 55 58 60 A ERE x39 64445 ee oes oes oes ER 203 Alarmi Dae usce m eG Grn ep ak amp ee Gee USERS 24 Alarm Securty Alm ies tero pP ER bone T USES 18 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio sss 271 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 25 s wx s 923 959 Disposal EE 525 An
404. rear of the vehicle Attach the wheel wrench to the extension tube Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click three or four times It cannot be overtightened Push against the tire several times to be sure it is firmly in place 492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HOISTING A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking locations Refer to the graphics that show jacking loca tions However a floor jack or frame hoist must never be used on any other parts or the underbody CAUTION Never use a floor jack directly under the differential housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle may result JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It cou
405. replaced immediately Loose or damaged winch installation must be corrected immediately Always be sure any element which can interfere with safe winching operations is removed prior to initiating winching Continued 366 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Continued e Always keep remote control lead clear of the igging drum wire rope and r e Inspect for cracks pinches frayed wires or loose connections Replace if damaged H XA e Q X Q eP X ur E oT S E eP H e Q eP A e Watch and listen to Winch for through the rollers proper snugness zm ET e Ee TT ee SEES EER SEE ae lada waa WERE d te M ien es oe en er areata Sosa atat het ee a a r n a e r aa M ON D DD E aaah um Ee MM 1 Inspect the winch winch mount and wire rope for damage Do not use the winch if the mount is loose or rope shows excessive wear or damage 2 Put on gloves ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 3 Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the 4 Free the winch hook and attach the hook strap Free winch drum rotate the clutch lever on the winch to the winch hook from its anchor point Attach the hook disengage Freespooling conserves battery power strap to the hook if not attached 814a0dd4 Free Spool Hook Strap 368 STARTING AND OPERATING M 5 Pull the wire to the anchor point
406. rior to removing the tailgate UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 Disconnecting the Rear Camera If Equipped 1 Open the tailgate to access the rear camera connector bracket located on the rear sill 036906362 Locking Tab 3 Disconnect the chassis wiring harness ensuring the connector bracket does not fall into the sill Connector Bracket 4 Connect the chassis plug and bracket provided in the 2 Remove the connector bracket from the sill by press glove box to the chassis wiring harness and insert the ing inward in the locking tab bracket back into the sill 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 5 Connect the tailgate plug provided in the glove box to the tailgate wiring harness to ensure that the terminals do not corrode 6 Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the forward facing surface of the tailgate This will prevent damaging the connector and bracket when storing or reinstalling the tailgate Removing the Tailgate 1 Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera if equipped refer to Disconnecting the Rear Camera If Equipped in this section 2 Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by releasing the lock tang from the pivot 036905824 Locking Tang 3 Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side pivot clears the hanger bracket 4 Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side pivot 5 Remove the
407. rmation As an example assume your vehicle has a recommended cold tire inflation placard pressure parked for more than 3 hours of 35 psi 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring lamp Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi 207 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring lamp will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring lamp will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire placard pressure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor dam age Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor e
408. roblems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter ee STARTING AND OPERATING 431 e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some
409. roperly Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability For Information about snowplow applications visit www dodge com or refer to the current Dodge Body Builders Guide 1 The maximum number of occupants in the truck should not exceed two 2 The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear GAWR should never be exceeded 3 Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of options or passengers etc The loaded vehicle weight including the snowplow system all aftermarket accessories driver passengers options and cargo must not exceed either the Gross Vehicle Weight GVWR or Gross Axle Weight GAWR ratings These weights are specified on the Safety Com pliance Certification Label on the driver s side door opening NOTE Detach the snowplow when transporting pas sengers Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifica tions at the factory without consideration for the weight of the plow Front end toe in should be checked and reset ee STARTING AND OPERATING 461 if necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow season This will help prevent uneven tire wear The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is parked Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equip ment following the recommendations provided by the specific snowplow manufacturer Over the Road Operation With Snowplow Attached The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the engine to operate at higher than normal tempera
410. rough standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope If natural obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and cautiously If you must back down a hill back straight down using REVERSE gear Never back down in NEUTRAL or diago nally across the hill When driving over sand mud and other soft terrain shift to low gear and drive steadily Apply the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning the wheels Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage
411. rranty L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter WARNING Rotate the tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the transfer case fluid Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect exhaust system including isolators e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your prd per hues Gas eee eee ee DIG AAR E 581 O Prepare For The Appointment 581 df te dies Hi 46444 fevered apne ade DI 581 o Be Reasonable With Requests 581 W if You Need Assistance 581 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 582 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 582 O In Mexico Contact i s EER N RE a D Customer Assist
412. rriage e Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large enough to contact the door sills Crossing a Ravine Gully Ditch Washout or Rut When crossing a ravine gully ditch washout or a large rut the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle s mobility Approach these obstacles at a 45 degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently You need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover If you get caught in a rut dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45 degree angle ahead of the front tires Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created You should now be able to drive out following the trench you just created at a 45 degree angle WARNING There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an obstacle at any angle with steep sides Crossing Logs To cross a log approach it at a slight angle approxi mately 10 to 15 degrees This allows one front tire to be on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log While climbing the log modulate your brake and 342 STARTING AND OPERATING ee accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your tires Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes CAUTION Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter than the running
413. rt vehicle available a high controlled force is required to recover the vehicle there is a high risk of environmen tal or vehicle damage or where nothing else seems to work A winch can deliver a high pulling force with a great deal of control It allows you to walk the vehicle tire by burying it Once you have determined an anchor point hook up the cable ensuring there are a least five wraps of cable left on the drum and place a floor mat or something else over the strung out cable Placing something over the strung out cable helps keep the cable on the ground if it breaks Next place the vehicle in first gear and apply a very light throttle 352 STARTING AND OPERATING ie as you power the winch in Be careful not to allow always a good idea to check for damage That way you slack in the cable as you recover the vehicle Do not try can get any problems taken care of right away and have to guide the cable into the drum If it starts to bunch your vehicle ready when you need it up on one end let it You can re spool the cable afterwards Never use a winch cable as a tow strap and always stand back while winching e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage WARNING e Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required Winch cables are under high tension when in use and 1 can become a projectile if they fail Never stand over
414. rt the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the message Insert Key Turn To On will flash in the EVIC until you insert the Key Fob into the ignition swich Once inserted the message Turn To On will flash in the EVIC until you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Remote Start Comfort Systems If Equipped When remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For more information on Remote Start Comfort System operation refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock plunger down or unlocked by moving the lock plunger up N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Front doors
415. rt way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE e f the window runs into any obstacle during the auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually e If the Auto Up function is lost reset the Auto Up function by running the window all the way up and then hold the switch in the full up position for two seconds WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Window LOCKOUT Switch 4 Door Models The window LOCKOUT switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window LOCK button into the latched or down position To enable the window controls press the win dow LOCK button again and return the switch to the released or up position Sr 021905732 Window Lockout Switch 1 Window Lockout Switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the e
416. rted device any e To Exit List mode without selecting a track press the where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can same PRESET button again to go back to Play alter the operation or damage the device Follow mode the device manufacturer s guidelines e LIST button The LIST button will display the top ce items on the iPod or connections to the level menu of the iPod Turn the TUNE control knob iPod in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connectors to list the top menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the iPod then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this system Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Uconnect Multimedia SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN RER RBZ RES RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation
417. ry NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning as this can cause damage to driveline components ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 324 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 4WD LOCK
418. ry for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515 WARNING Continued CAUTION e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep e It is essential when replacing the cables on the flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals
419. s 437 USCS DC od eee eee rrr 539 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 142 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap ss aa duret hs 438 507 Gasoline Fuel sucus ueueat RE os DE oe ee IR 428 E ON ei ME sasies HERROEP RE Se 226 227 Gasoline Reformulated 429 Gauges Coolant Temperature 25 dex I9 eis oud 200 ln ene e see REDE RO HI de ss 200 HIDE rr 204 DDOSHDNIGISl 44540 oh DE PPS RE CERE PES 201 WACHOMCIC a scnuqperoes KPO e Pa RP PR ER 200 bio 208 ed cuu AS PEER EE DEI iiaee i 303 311 General Information 18 25 428 Glass CIERRE acento euend teehee deeds byes 538 Grocery Bag Keine 445544425 HER oa ri 168 Gross Axle Weight Rating so men RR ERR 442 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating sees ive ms 441 Guide Body Builders 3 cu scendere MA RD don en HE 6 GV 23 vba gone fb bee oa eee eee EE 439 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 98 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow anding ale a4 sepe sacs d a iw eee eee bee es 354 Hazard Warning Flasher uos vs xe shee een bees 472 Head Des als 4 54 5 26 a Gn oh oy KORO LR ri 101 FICGQUOIIS 3 24 9 224p US ERE ES ES S EEEREN 545 N INDEX 597 Automatic 245 999 OS OO FO AAS sess 113 Sc A 538 FH Bean PPP E 119 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 119 Lients OmREMnder u oed era Ex orbe 117 Passe P sas 119 oe osc enh oe Sors mue rx mcus ee mem 113 Heated Mirrors leen 95 168 Heated Seats
420. s Programming If Equipped The Auto Unlock Doors feature can be enabled or dis abled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings System Setup in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this programming procedure 3 Insert the Key Fob into the ignition 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the Key Fob from the OFF position to the ON position a minimum of four times ending in the OFF position Do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door UNLOCK switch 6 A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has been changed 7 Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of this feature 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 8 If a chime is not heard the program mode was canceled before the feature could be changed If neces sary repeat the above procedure Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat the rear doors if equipped of your vehicle have the child protection door lock system d Child Protection Door Lock Location 022605851 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR
421. s Suas d AA ASE EE N ves 103 Heater AR OE N Ree OE N ER a 278 Heater Engine DICKE sade see ww sar E Reg 299 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 119 Hitches Maer TOWING ooie RR R3 DERS EED EA 445 HONIO saad sonata wd ees eee oan a oe EN 492 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 142 Hood Release 222 5 9o ERR EER DR 110 IUDA TEE EE BETER PE PS 487 Jondol 249 242 9299 he eee ee SUES eae ee a eS 14 EE era SR N EE 12 14 Site Removal 24 444 0 EER PERD SA Es 14 WN ated Eny auc etudes ede ede nese kas 19 Immobilizer Sentry Key ous aoa tat Siete go 15 Infant Restraint 242292 RE ERST ES 66 67 Inflation Pressure Tires suus er rERTeSEEs 413 Information Center Vehicle LL 217 Inside Rearview Mirror SS 91 Instrument Cluster s 196 198 200 Instrument Panel and Controls 195 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 538 Integrated Power Module Fuses 539 Integrated Trailer Brake Controls 451 interior Appearance Care sepie RR RR 597 Intent iene a 244 3 22 4 a ie IE RAAR RE 115 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 120 IROGUCHON APE AO AE AT OE ET OT OE Inverter Outlet 115V 598 INDEX M Jack Location s fu bbb EV RES UIS C PERS E 472 JUMP State oe Ee ERROR 492 Key Frocramimin 26 pee bated satakin LR S 17 Key Replacement uius exa b pubs 4 99 AE 17 Key Sentry immobilizer a9 scm greek e 15 IS I Reminder 2342 des
422. se four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4WD AUTO Four Wheel Drive Auto Range This range sends power to the rear wheels The four wheel drive system will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction Additional traction for varying road conditions 4WD LOCK Four Wheel Drive Lock Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 4WD LOW Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range provides low speed four wheel drive Locks the front and rear drive shafts together forcing the
423. seat belt remains unbuckled or unretracted Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancies Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use the seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Driver and Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat Airbag and Knee Boltser Location belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Fro
424. sed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in the TOW HAUL mode fifth gear is dis abled and 2 3 and 3 4 shift patterns are modified NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 315 051205601 TOW HAUL Switch Shifts into Overdrive fourth gear are allowed during steady cruise for improved fuel economy and automatic closed throttle downshifts to third gear are performed for improved braking when driving conditions warrant The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the button must be pressed each time the engine is started Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during acceleration when the transmission downshifts to second gear the clut
425. significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE e Use seasonally adjusted E85 fuel ASTM D5798 With non seasonally adjusted E85 fuel you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed especially when the ambient temperature is below 32 F 0 C e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E85 and Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 436 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Starting The characteristics of E85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase
426. six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON e The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the ap proximate four to six second interval e The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of a collision your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment if applicable and up to a quarter second of either high speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and is otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss
427. sos o dnce cops qc om e n 208 High Beam Low Beam Select 119 Muminated ERU oos soe aie tee eee HERE ONS 19 Instrument Cluster 196 200 hours M C F C c IPT 115 141 Li BIS ORE Reinders sd vee 5464 nee ands 117 Low Fuel 6 46444 pem EE MEUSE RECS ded GO 208 Oil Pressure gata ghee oe N AK Uma 210 ccn AM P TP ees vi 119 Seat Belt Reminder 215 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 205 Service ee es 545 Gide Marker 2222429 94 BOERE RES EA DER 554 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 203 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 211 Traction Control sess Eder 6 S ESS 391 Transfer Case 44244 4624 ET FEE IE N 320 Teri ione uso ad OP MR RR EP EV S rden 84 118 545 548 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 196 200 Limited Ship Differential Rm 353 530 Load VORIO sos guts fais a 3999 DRR NC ea ea 439 VCS ue oe ee eee EE eee E PEE 402 LOGS cue eee eee es aes oe ee ee ee oes aes 28 Child Protection 0 0000 00000 92 DOOF ressas Dee ERA AO OER ED 28 Power Door 6 229p dede aC BES He 404 Red N OA 29 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren IE it ee i22 Rie bs 4484 oe OR ER EE ON 70 babiieddoi BO sese 242 Vates Re ce 9 9 9 9 4 517 Maintenance 0 000 ee eee ee ee Maintenance Pree Battery iis cance eed HAAR Maintenance Procedures seen Maintenance Schedule Malfunction Indicator Light Che
428. stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 429 Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability for the engine and fuel system components 430 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability p
429. stem has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Display Fuel Saver If Equipped The Fuel Saver Mode message is located in the Compass Temperature display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Compass Variance Refer to Compass Display for more information Calibrate Compass Refer to Compass Display for more information MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN RER and RBZ radios contain a CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia REN RER or RBZ user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If ru Equipp
430. t Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking ru structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass ch
431. t and will increase the risk of injury in a collision When reattaching the black latch and black buckle ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted If the webbing is twisted follow the preceding procedure to detach the black latch and black buckle untwist the webbing and reattach mu ER the black latch and black buckle epee ene Late Bate 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e If the black latch and black buckle are not prop erly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision When reattaching the black latch and black buckle ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted If the webbing is twisted follow the preceding procedure to detach the black latch and NENNEN black buckle untwist the webbing and reattach 1 UGE FORMON the black latch and black buckle 022632836 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front row outboard seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck Squeeze the anchorage button lo cated on the upper belt guide to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that fits you best MT Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if
432. t in moving the seat any farther rearward NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be en abled or disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at the base of the instrument panel UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 RUN Hood Release Safety Latch 1500 Series Shown 2 Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood CAUTION and push the safety latch lever from right to left to release it before raising the hood To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the front center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death LIGHTS The headlight switch is located on the left side of the x instrument panel next to the steering wheel The head j 0314057701 light switch controls the operation of the headlights
433. t includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered strap It also has a c clip that is used for storage when not in use for the winter months During winter months remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on the c clip 300 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving CAUTION Continued e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause into any forward gear when the engine is above electrocution idle speed e Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION is firmly on the brake pedal CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition
434. t is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other Ways N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 WARNING WARNING Continued Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere wit
435. tch Description 2500 Models If Equipped WARNINCG Never operate your vehicle with the TPMS and tire pressures set to the Light Load Inflation Pressure settings if carrying more than two occupants 150 Ibs 68 kg each plus 200 pounds 91 kg of cargo The vehicle Light Load Definition is found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information Label which is located on the rear face of the driver door Failure to do so may cause you to lose control resulting in an accident causing serious or fatal injury The TPMS tire light load inflation switch will allow the driver to switch between the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold and the light load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold depending on the vehicle s load condition The Tire and Loading Information label defines the recommended front and rear cold tire inflation pressures for the vehicle when operating in the Max Load condition A Supple mental Tire Pressure Information label is also available defining Light Load tire inflation pressures when oper ating in the Light Load condition When the tire light load inflation switch LED is ON the TPMS is using the light load inflation pressure cold low inflation warning thresholds ee STARTING AND OPERATING 425 Tire Light Load Inflation Switch Operation If Equipped v e This vehicle may have different recommended tire pressure values between the front and rear tires
436. ted or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Flash Lamps With Lock When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Headlamps With Wipers When this feature is selected and the HEADLIGHT switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deact
437. ted your driving speeds and stopping in or to account for the lack of the feature may be in acci dent ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Fue Economy ACC 200 km h 041008786 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC NOTE e The compass on your vehicle is self calibrating elimi nating the need to manually calibrate the compass e The EVIC main menu will display Radio Off AM FM and SAT radio stations and AUX HDD sources at the top of the main menu above Fuel Economy 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e System Status display e Vehicle information warning message displays e Customer Programmable Features System Setup e Compass display e Outside temperature display e Trip computer functions e Fuel Economy display e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode display e Audio Modes display Steering wheel EVIC control button as it appears on the left side of the steer ing wheel Press and release the UP button to scroll up ward through the main menus Fuel Economy Vehicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Messages Units Sys
438. tem Setup and sub menus Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the main menus and sub menus Steering wheel EVIC control button as it appears on the right side of the steering wheel Press and release the SELECT button for access to main menus sub menus or to select a SELECT personal setting in the system setup menu sack Press the BACK button to scroll back to a previous menu or sub menu EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Left front turn signal lamp out UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Right front turn signal lamp out Left rear turn signal lamp out Right rear turn signal lamp out Service air filter Check Tire Pressure Perform service ESP Off Service Tire Pressure System Coolant Low Check Trailer Brake Wiring Service Trailer Brake System Trailer Brake Connected Trailer Brake Disconnected 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Lights On Keyfob Battery Low ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Wrong Key Damaged Key Key not programmed Key In Ignition Turn Signal On RKE Battery Low LOW WASHER FLUID Oil Change Due gt Dealer Info Park Assist On Park Assist Off Warning Object Detected Left Front Turn Signal Light Out Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out Right Front Turn Signal Light Out Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
439. tener and lift the cover over the access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this 6 Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment access hole Screws 5 Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle 8 Reach through the access hole of the wheel house splash shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough to disengage it from the lock post on the back of the front lamp unit housing 073306874 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547 CAUTION e Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp the bulb socket or the lamp wiring MM NOTE There are access covers over both headlamp M mm bulb access holes in the guad front lamp unit housing if 9 Remove the headlamp assembly Grasp the outboard equipped These covers MUST be reinstalled after the edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to disen bulb has been replaced gage the ball stud from the plastic grommet 10 Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the bulb socket 11 Replace bulb s as necessary 548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Fog Lamps Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Backup Lamps 1 Reach under and behind the front bumper to access 1 Remove
440. ter Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary t Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road snow plowing or frequent trailer towing Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect exhaust system including isolators a a a a a m Hd a M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 572 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or Schedule 102 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule _I Rotate the tires Change the engine oil and engine oil _J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Rotate the tires Replace the top row of spark plugs 4 7L Engine Lube the front drive shaft fitting Replace the side row of spark plugs 4 7L Engine 2500 3500 4x4 models only Replace the ignition cables 4 7L Engine Flush and replace the engine coolant if Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only not done at 60 months Inspect the brake
441. ter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon SSE EAEE oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car e Doors closed bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious TE injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters e HAZARD switch off away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls e BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed t could cause serious injury or death e Ignition key removed from ignition switch Remote Start Abort Message on Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped e RKE PANIC button not pressed The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely e Dattery at an acceptable charge level e Fuel meets minimum requirement e Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 e Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar e Remote Start Aborted
442. th an other vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle 388 STARTING AND OPERATING M The system will only work if the intended direction of the vehicle and vehicle gear match For example if the intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE and the activation criteria are met HSA will activate The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears and will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL Towing and Hauling with HSA The HSA system does not know if your vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer unless the TOW HAUL switch lo cated on the center stack is selected When activated the TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting and Operating for further information In order to accommodate the extra weight entailed under towing and hauling conditions and to increase driver comfort while launching on a hill the system recognizes when the TOW HAUL switch is activated and compen sates by releasing brake pressure at a slower rate while throttle is applied in order to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the hill WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer
443. the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup o Y 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the airbag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNINCG Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Differ ent airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink y
444. the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMEN
445. the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change
446. the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated e the transmission has reached normal operating temperature NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into OVER DRIVE and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of OVERDRIVE until the transmission cools down After the transmission cools down the transmission will resume normal operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 The transmission will downshift from OVERDRIVE to DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully pressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When op
447. the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoul der belts properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear y
448. the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for high pits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd_week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 EE STARTING AND OPERATING 401 Tire Terminology and Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation press
449. the two screws that pass through the bed the back of the front fog lamp housing sheetmetal 2 Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector from the fog lamp bulb 3 Rotate the bulb counterclockwise 1 4 turn to unlock the bulb from the housing 4 Pull the bulb straight out from the housing CAUTION Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result 073306034 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549 2 Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far 4 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise 1 4 turn to enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the outboard unlock it from the housing side of the lamp housing from the two plastic snap post retainers in the outer box side panel 5 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket CAUTION Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result 6 Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and housing 073306035 3 Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the bulb socket 550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL With Cargo Lamp 1 Remove the two screws holding the housing lens to the body as shown socket and bulb from housing 4 Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket 2 Separate the
450. ther information Self Limiting Control The memory system includes a self limiting control for full travel positioning of power seat and adjustable pedal movement all directions This self limiting control may however develop an unintended movement limitation if an obstruction is encountered sometime during usage One example of such an occurrence may include a box or package obstructing the full rearward movement of the driver s seat Once the obstruction is removed the self limiting control may store a new maximum position the self limiting control may be reset by reaching the new stored position then press and release MEMORY button 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 1 or 2 Continued seat travel beyond the new stored position will indicate the self limiting control has been reset Driver Easy Exit and Easy Entry Control This additional feature provides automatic driver s seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility into and out of the vehicle The seat cushion will move rearward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will move forward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Exit and Easy Entry position The Easy Exit and Easy Entry feature may be automatically disabled if the seat is positioned rearward enough and there is no benefi
451. ther information NOTE ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during hard braking maneuvers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 WARNING e ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS If Equipped The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS functions similarly to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stab
452. ther than full cold or full hot between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Mode Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Mode Pe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Mode y Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use the DEFROST mode with maximum blower and warm temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX and DEFROST or a blend of these modes even if the A C button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Press this button to choose between outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle A LED will illuminate when you are in Recircula tion mode Only use the Recirculation T 04563284 Mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather
453. ti Lock Brake System ABS lt 2 52e eset rs 384 Anti Lock Warning Light 214 383 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 ANU hel SU SEI ione acts vidct SU ee ewan Ga 18 meisie CAG an 22059 coo oe POCO DP obe d 534 AE a ae EER ee ee 155 Auto Down Power Windows DD Automatic Dimming Mirror i soe 98 ER 92 Automatic Headlights 4 1 i a oe AR RR X ps 113 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 283 Automatic Transmission Ls 303 POCO TING su ei yao poe ERE RS TEES 9932 Proud ang Filter Changes ia ese 969 3 PERD RE 533 N INDEX 591 Fluid Level Check 52 2529522222 Ee 531 532 PIG TVPG PP 531 558 Gear RUS as usce pops d dcs d ees eee soos 303 satio Cnm 308 Special Additives ai a ost EK AE eee d GE 534 Torque C OBVELIB a 4 654 4654 06 parte erinan 308 Axle Fluid ss eee Be eee ee e AS ek eH 529 558 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 529 back WO AMONG sce gin Ba RE REDE om v 3 godes 138 Dae sy oase eg PURO PESE hou ceed P E ES 514 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 Saving Feature Protection 17 belts Sedb sit EERS ERAS OE He oe 38 82 Body Builders Guide ia stsiuesediescwa d 6 Body Mechanism Lubrication 517 B Pillaf LOCAHON 4 05265 4444464 ER 640050083 402 Brake ASSISPONSIOHE 4454444468 IORNU E Re de UN 386 Brake Control System Electronic ss 45443465 384 Brake Fluid 442345556 iese ARE ESE DS 527 558
454. tial Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 393 requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion WARNING In the Partial Off mode the engine torque reduc tion and stability features are desensitized There fore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable All Four Wheel Drive Vehicles in 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK Modes Can Also Choose the Following ESP Operating Mode This is the Only ESP Operating Mode in 4WD LOW Full Off This mode is intended for off road use when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by pressing and holding the ESP OFF switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running After five seconds the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESP Off message will appear in the odometer Press and release the trip odometer button located on the instru ment cluster to clear this message NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed into the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared In this mode ESP and TCS except for the limited slip
455. tion disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move NOTE Both the manual shift and electronic shift trans even if the transmission is in PARK The parking fer cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL for recreational brake should always be applied when the driver is towing Automatic transmissions must be shifted into the not in the vehicle PARK position for recreational towing Refer to the following for the proper transfer case NEUTRAL shifting procedure for your vehicle Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Models CAUTION Failure to follow these requirements can cause severe damage to the transmission and or transfer case 464 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 with the transmission in DRIVE 10 Turn OFF the engine It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre 11 Firmly apply the parking brake 12 Shift the transmission into PARK ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop CAUTION 2 Shut OFF the engine un Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans 3 Press and hold the brake pedal mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in M NEUTRAL and the engine running With the transfer Boab IIS tenet sion ie DUO Kil case in NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is OFF prior 5 Shift the transfer case
456. to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when 2 Spare Tire operating the jack or changing the wheel Removing the Spare Tire 1 Wheel Wrench It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to 2 Set the parking brake avoid tangling the loose cable 3 Place the shift lever into PARK On four wheel drive vehicles shift the transfer case to the 4L position 480 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sa 4 Turn the ignition OFF Instructions 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher WARNING 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if the right front wheel is being changed block the left rear wheel Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle il jl N iti i RAP i aU i i ul TORTE Br li e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle yl i l i Fd P i cotta N b BERE LE mm NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to when the vehicle is being jacked be raised e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Contin
457. torage tray with floor mounted shifter Power Outlet Floor Shifter e Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment if equipped d 4 dy Yr L E i ero Ar LU TEE r2 vy v 24 EJ P A MV pus f vx o VEEL i ve n 33 9 4 Io IA tf ug MJ AM Power Outlet Upper Lid e Rear of the center console storage compartment Quad Cab or Crew Cab UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 034605811 Power Outlet Rear Center Console The key symbol indicates that this outlet can supply power when the key is in the ON RUN or ACC posi tions All accessories connected to the outlet s should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting
458. traint and remove the slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufactur er s instructions Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of
459. treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit Character format types Program Type Display 16 Digit Character rogram Type Displ spay No program type None or undefined NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to th
460. ttom of the switch will decrease the volume The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio CD or other valid audio source The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre set station that you have programmed in the radio pre set pushbuttons CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CDs on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge av
461. tton is pressed during the first two seconds of the track it will NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 jump to the previous track in the list pressing this button at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track Pressing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode it will jump to the next track in the list While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod mode to repeat the current playing track Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode which will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M During Scan mode pressing the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons will select the previous and next tracks e RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing
462. tton on the headlight switch 23 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the Anti lock Brake System reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The veh
463. ture will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio Uconnect gps RER Only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savi
464. tures Therefore when transporting the plow angle the blade completely and position it as low as road or surface conditions permit Do not exceed 40 mph 64 km h The operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance and allow adequate passing clearance Operating Tips Under ideal snow plowing conditions 20 mph 32 km h should be maximum operating speed The operator should be familiar with the area and surface to be cleaned Reduce speed and use extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility NOTE During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped with outside temperature display the display may show higher temperatures than the outside ambient tempera ture The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient tempera ture sensor caused by the snowplow In addition on vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control ATC it is suggested that the interior cabin temperature be manually controlled should the system not perform as desired while in automatic mode Both the outside tem perature display and ATC operation will return to nor mal when the snowplow is removed 462 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx Id General Maintenance Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the plow manufacturer s instructions Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery terminals clean and free of corrosion When plowing snow to avoid transmission and drive t
465. uch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 6 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed MEDIA CENTER 130 RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Ed bed fmm om om LS GI SSS SINGLE DISC MPI PUSM AUDIO SELECT Dr 042305232 Media Ce
466. uctions The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo nents NOTE The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by depressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights 4WD 4LOW and 4WD AUTO are located on the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection When you select a different transfer case posi tion the position indicator lights will do the following If All Shift Conditions Are Met The current position indicator light will turn OFF 2 The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift 3 When the shift is complete the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met 1 The indicator light for the current position will remain ON ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 2 The newly selected position indicator light will con tinue to flash 3 The transfer case will not shift NOTE Before retrying a
467. ued WARNING Continued Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 481 A 7 P ES Jack Warning Label 1 Remove the spare wheel jack and tools from storage 2 Using the wheel wrench loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Placement of the jack 482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se e 1500 Series Trucks x m When changing a front wheel place the scissors jack under the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown 817e6cee 4X4 Jacking Location Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench The tube extension may be used but is not 800980 required 4X2 Jacking Location N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483 For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks when changing a rear wheel Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the CAUTION axle between the wheel a
468. ully applied before leaving the vehicle 054105820 Parking Brake Release Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the shift lever is in the PARK position When parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 WARNING e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving Failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to excessive heating of the rear brakes When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle BRAKE SYSTEM If power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the bra
469. um loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 404 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available carg
470. under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces NS TA TING AND OPERATING 383 The system s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation This is normal The ABS conducts a low speed selftest at about 10 mph 16 km h If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal movement The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow This is normal When you are in a severe braking condition involving use of the ABS you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a complete stop This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system and is normal Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation You may also hear a clicking noise These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning ABS Warning Light The ABS includes an amber warning light When the light is illuminated the ABS is not functioning The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes WARNING e Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The Anti Lock Brake System AB
471. unigue fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E85 or Unleaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles E85 Fuel Cap 434 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Ethanol Fuel E85 f CAUTION E85 is a mixture of approximately 8576 fuel ethanol and Only vehicles with the E85 fuel filler door label can 15 unleaded gasoline operate on E85 WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame 4 Fuel Requirements Btaeagag If your vehicle is E85 compatible it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E85 fuel or any mixture of these two fuels E85 Badge ee STARTING AND OPERATING 435 For best results a refueling pattern that avoids alternat ing between E85 and unleaded gasoline is recom mended When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not add less than 5 gal 19 L when refueling e you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or
472. unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than ten seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System To Lock the Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR V
473. ur vehicle for more than 21 days we recommend that you take the following steps to mini mize the drain on your vehicle s battery Disconnect the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse located in the Integrated Power Module located in the engine compartment The IOD cavity includes a snap in re tainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected without removing it from the fuse block As an alternative to the above steps you may discon nect the negative cables from both batteries Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again NOTE e When reinstalling the IOD fuse push firmly until fully seated the gauges in the instrument cluster will do a full sweep when the ignition switch is turned to the RUN position This is a normal condition When the vehicle is shipped from the factory the IOD fuse is in the up or extracted position If the radio interior lamps keyless entry or other features do not work with the key OFF check the position of the fuse or check to see if the fuse is blown to ensure that it is fully seated When the IOD fuse is extracted the instrument cluster in the odometer window will dis play NO FUSE N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545 REPLAC
474. ur vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or six in the case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the 410 STARTING AND OPERATING xe original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your Tire Spinning vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without vehicle at the first opportunity stopping when you are stuck WARNING Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergenci
475. ure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure 402 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location aar ZEN ox NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS on the driver s side B Pillar NEVEREXCEED XXX XNX ies 2 3 SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle Tire Placard Location 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires ee STARTING AND OPERATING 403 Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maxim
476. ure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle seat belt instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH child restraint anchorage systems are installed in the Quad Cab Mega Cab and Crew Cab rear seat outboard positions LATCH equipped seating positions feature both lower anchor bars located at the back of the seat cushion and tether strap anchorages located behind the seat back refer to Child Restraint Tether Anchor lt a 022632637 N aes 1 QN Quad Cab Mega Cab Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side Child restraint systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the seat back tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Because the lower anchora
477. ure to do so can result in serious injury or death NOTE If snow ice mud or anything else builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens CAUTION Turning ParkView On or Off With Navigation Multimedia Radio e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only LP the hardi Press the menu hard key be used as a parking aid The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your 2 Select system setup soft key drive path 3 Press the camera setup soft key Continued 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key 5 Press the save soft key 6 When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE an image of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to check entire surroundings displayed across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear 7 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again Turning ParkView On or Off Without Navigation Multimedia Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key 4 When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE an
478. urer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 1 800 485 2001 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 584 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi
479. use damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path WARNING Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving You could lose control and have an accident Always St adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked Electronic Speed Control Lever NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut When engaged Electronic Speed Control takes over the down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button located in the end of the lever once and the cruise indicator light located in the mes sage window of the cluster will illuminate showing that the Electronic Speed Control system is on To turn the Electronic Speed Control system off push the ON OFF button a second time and both the Electronic Speed Control system and indicator will turn off WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dan
480. ve wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid 2 3 4 5 Dd Actual Gear s 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 5 Allowed Applies to vehicles equipped with 4 7L and 5 7L engines only NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking hold the shift lever switch in the position and hold it there The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down STARTING AND OPERATING 311 Gear Ranges Do not race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear range PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever in the PARK position On four wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a DRIVE position 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING WARNING Continued e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK the parking brake Always apply the parking or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake movement and possible injury or damage pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose
481. ways be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity inflation pressures under any load condition While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals More frequent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed STARTING AND OPERATING 417 SS ES C Ex RE Tire Rotation 055703771 418 STARTING AND OPERATING Dual Rear Wheels CAUTI
482. wice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON RUN and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage th
483. with a coupling king pin Gooseneck Hitch The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed Trailer Hitch Classification The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg without added equipment or alter ations to the standard equipment Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer 446 STARTING AND OPERATING M Weight Ratings for the website address that contains the necessary information for your specific drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium Dut Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg Heavy Dut Fifth Wheel Greater than 10 000 lbs Gooseneck 4540 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Uem Trailer Weight Ratings for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
484. with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability and braking performance and could result in an accident Continued 444 STARTING AND OPERATING See WARNING Continued e Weight distributing systems may not be compat ible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec reational Vehicle dealer for additional information 057003769 EXAMPLE With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct 057003770 EXAMPLE Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect ee STARTING AND OPERATING 445 057003768 EXAMPLE Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect Fifth Wheel Hitch The fifth wheel hitch is a special high platform with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed It connects a vehicle and fifth wheel trailer
485. you your passengers and others around you that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave Shallow Standing Water effects Although your vehicle is capable of driving through Continued shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so 356 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Continued WARNING e Driving through standing water may cause dam e Driving through standing water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving th
486. your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immedi ate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines N that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the EVIC telltale display area Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press 508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE See the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration I v nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL
487. ys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC system serviced as well N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modi fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho rized dea
488. ys to successful off road driving so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture Avoid sudden accelerations turns or braking In most cases there are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Therefore you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what isn t When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over CAUTION Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials The heat from your vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire 338 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off road situation When To Use Low Range When driving off road shift into 4L Low Range for additional traction or to improve handling and control on slippery or difficult terrain Due to the lower gearing low range will allow the engine to operate in a higher power range This will allow you to idle over obstacles and down hills with improved control and less effort Also use 4L Low Range in rain ice snow mud sand to get heavy loads rolling improve traction or whenever 4H High Range traction will not do the job Driving In Snow Mud And Sand There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in snow mud

2010 Dodge Ram Truck Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents